JP7135044B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko game machine.

There has been proposed a gaming machine that displays a title that informs the type of ready-to-win effect at the start of the ready-to-win effect (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2016-101428 A

In a gaming machine such as that described in Patent Document 1, it is desired to enhance the presentation effect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with enhanced performance effects.

(A) A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed using the display means;
When receiving the first command, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state with a predetermined reach using a specific character,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the expected degree of control to the advantageous state is different from that of the predetermined reach and that the control to the advantageous state is performed with the specific reach using the specific character. is possible and
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
A common animation effect using the specific character can be executed in a predetermined period immediately before the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach and the title notification corresponding to the specific reach are performed,
When the first command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size smaller than the first size during the predetermined period. In addition, the reach mode is set, and after the predetermined period is over, the title announcement corresponding to the predetermined reach is either a normal mode or a change mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the normal mode and controlled to the advantageous state. , and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the presentation mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach is completed, and to the predetermined reach. Even after the corresponding title notification is completed, the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode,
When the second command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode during the predetermined period. a reach mode, and after the predetermined period is over, title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode; It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the corresponding title notification is finished, and even after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is finished. The decoration identification information is the second size and the reach mode,
When the third command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode during the predetermined period. A reach mode is adopted, and after the predetermined period is over, title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the normal mode, and in the predetermined reach. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the presentation mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the notification of the corresponding title is finished, and even after the notification of the title corresponding to the predetermined reach is finished. The decoration identification information is the second size and the reach mode,
When the fourth command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode during the predetermined period. a reach mode, and after the predetermined period is over, title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode; It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the corresponding title notification is finished, and even after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is finished. The decoration identification information is the second size and the reach mode ,
The game machine , wherein the common animation effect is not a plurality of types but only one type of effect .
In addition, (1) in order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine according to another aspect ,
A game machine (for example, a pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to a player,
Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, ready-to-win effect) that suggests being controlled to the advantageous state;
A title notification means (for example, the effect control CPU 120) capable of informing the title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify the title corresponding to the suggestive effect when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the suggestive effect (for example, FIGS. 9(D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

(2) In the gaming machine of (1) above, the suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestive effects, and in the plurality of types of suggestive effects, at least part of the effect within the predetermined period of time. may be executed in a common manner (for example, FIG. 9(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which suggestive effect is to be executed, thereby improving interest.

(3) In the gaming machine of (1) or (2) above, at a plurality of execution timings during execution of the suggestive effect, a specific effect (e.g., development effect or advance notice effect) suggesting control to the advantageous state is performed. It is executable, and the execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period. According to such a configuration, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation even after the title is announced.

(4) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (3), the suggestive effect execution means includes at least a first suggestive effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A and super reach B) and a first suggestive effect as the suggestive effect. 2 suggestion effects (for example, super reach D and super reach E reach effects), and in the second suggestion effect, the title informing means is capable of executing the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect. You may make it alert|report the title corresponding to. According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute the notification of the title according to the suggestive effect, so the effect of the effect is improved.

(5) In the gaming machine of (4) above, the ratio of control to the advantageous state is higher when the first suggestive effect is executed than when the second suggestive effect is executed. good too. According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, the suggestive effect executing means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in an effect mode related to the title notified during the predetermined period. may According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of the above (1) to (6), detection means (for example, stick controller 31A or push button 31B) capable of detecting the action of the player, and a specific display corresponding to the detection means ( (for example, a small button image 31AK043, a large button image 31AK047, and a stick image 31AK051). (for example, small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) that is more advantageous to the player than the first specific display, and can be detected by the detection means. during the non-effective period of, after displaying the first specific display, changing the first specific display to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 17(E), FIG. 18(I)), During the valid period, an action effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 18(J) and (K)). According to such a configuration, the performance effect is improved.

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above, as the suggestive display suggesting the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestive display having a display size of a first size (Fig. 19 19A), and a second suggestive display whose display size is the second size (such as the first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed during the shutter effect shown in FIG. 19D) 2 size reach title image 31AK062, etc.) and a display means (for example, the image display device 5, the effect control CPU 120), and the display means includes a plurality of types of elements with different modes (Fig. 19(a) , element E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry), etc. shown in (d)) (Fig. 19A ), a fruit pattern shown in (d), etc.), and when either the first suggestive display or the second suggestive display is displayed in the pattern containing the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are displayed. Displayed so as to be included in both the first suggestive display and the second suggestive display (both the shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 19A and 19D include elements E1 to E5. may be displayed so as to be included). According to such a configuration, the specific image can be preferably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestive display. This makes it possible to accurately convey that the specific image has been displayed.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flow chart which shows an example of game control main processing. It is a flow chart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a figure for demonstrating a variation pattern and the kind of reach. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an example of an advance notice effect determination process; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in an advance notice production|presentation determination process. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of a modification. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state in which the gaming machine frame is opened. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a jackpot type determination table. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a losing variation pattern determination table; It is an explanatory view showing a non-reach loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 121IW. It is a flowchart which shows the game control main process in characterizing part 121IW. 4 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing and setting change processing; FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing processing executed when power is turned on; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in setting change processing; It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows a part of production control main processing. 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; 9 is a flowchart showing a specific example of command analysis processing; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an initial payout determination table; It is a flow chart which shows an example of per special figure waiting processing in feature section 112AK. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the right-handed instruction|indication notification processing in the characteristic part 112AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestions in a characteristic part 112AK; It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution mode of the right hitting instruction|indication information in the characteristic part 112AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of specific alert|report in the characteristic part 112AK. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing in a feature part 113AK; FIG. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pending display stage determination table in characteristic portion 113AK; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display stage change pattern determination table in the characteristic portion 113AK; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display stage change pattern determination table in the characteristic portion 113AK; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display stage change pattern determination table in the characteristic portion 113AK; FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a display stage change pattern determination table in the characteristic portion 113AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of action effect execution setting processing in a characteristic portion 113AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the action production|presentation in characteristic part 113AK. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of the shape of an image displayed in action rendering in a characteristic portion 113AK; It is a figure which shows the example of production|presentation operation|movement in the case where the action production|presentation in the characteristic part 113AK and the prefetch announcement production|presentation are performed. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing in a characteristic portion 114AK; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of predetermined production execution setting processing in feature part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of common production|presentation in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the execution result of common production|presentation in characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the kind of common production|presentation in characteristic part 114AK. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing in a characteristic part 114AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestions in a characteristic portion 114AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestion modes in a characteristic portion 114AK; It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of common production|presentation and setting suggestion (suggestion production|presentation) in the characteristic part 114AK. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the setting suggestion mode in a modification. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing in a characteristic portion 115AK; FIG. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing in a characteristic unit 115AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestions in a characteristic portion 115AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestion modes in a characteristic portion 115AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of suggesting a setting in the characteristic portion 115AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing in a characteristic portion 115AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing in a characteristic part 116AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestions in a characteristic portion 116AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestion modes in a characteristic part 116AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of setting suggestion in the characteristic part 116AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion mode setting processing in a characteristic portion 117AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion mode in a characteristic portion 117AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion pattern setting processing in a characteristic part 117AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion pattern in a characteristic portion 117AK; FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion mode setting screen and a setting suggestion pattern setting screen in a characteristic portion 117AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display start setting processing in a characteristic portion 118AK; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows an example of selection effect execution setting processing in characteristic part 118AK. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a pattern of options in a characteristic portion 118AK; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing in a characteristic part 118AK; FIG. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestions in a characteristic part 118AK; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a determination ratio of setting suggestion modes in a characteristic part 118AK; FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of variable display effect processing in a characteristic portion 118AK; FIG. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of selection production|presentation and setting suggestion in the characteristic part 118AK. It is a figure which shows the production|presentation operation example of selection production|presentation in a modification, and a setting suggestion.

(Basic Description) First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Structure, etc. of Pachinko Gaming Machine 1) FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the arrangement layout of the main members. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 forming a game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area.

At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area), a variable display (also called a special game) of special symbols (also called special symbols) as a plurality of types of special identification information is displayed. A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

The "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, that a plurality of types of special symbols are variably displayed (the same applies to other symbols described later). Variations include updating display of a plurality of patterns, scrolling display of a plurality of patterns, deformation of one or more patterns, enlargement/reduction of one or more patterns, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols, which will be described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns, which will be described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, and one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to variable display of other symbols to be described later). Variable display may be expressed as variable display or variation.

The special symbols variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A are also called "first special symbols", and the special symbols variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B are also called "second special symbols". Also, a special game using the first special game is called a "first special game", and a special game using the second special game is called a "second special game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that variably display the special symbols may be one.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2 . The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and displays various effects images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5 .

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronism with the first special game and the second special game, a plurality of types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers) as decoration identification information different from the special patterns. variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, up and down direction scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern that are executed in synchronism is generically called simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying suspended display corresponding to the variable display whose execution is suspended and active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. Suspended display and active display are also collectively referred to as variable display corresponding display corresponding to variable display.

The number of variable representations that are reserved is also referred to as the number of reserved memories. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also referred to as the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also referred to as the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count is also referred to as the total reserved memory count.

In addition, at a predetermined position of the game board 2, a first suspension display 25A and a second suspension display 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided. , the number of first reserved memories is displayed, and the second reserved display 25B displays the number of second reserved memories according to the number of lit LEDs.

Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

Winning ball device 6A, for example, forms a first starting winning opening that is kept in a constant open state in which game balls can enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second starting winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball device 6B is provided with, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable winglets. comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and the closed state in which the game balls do not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening being closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second start winning opening (second start It is also said that the prize-winning mouth is open.). When the game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out, and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that changes between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to a device provided with an electric tulip-shaped accessory.

At predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four positions on the left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 which are always kept open by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when the player enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning hole is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 is provided with a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning door closes the big winning door, and the game ball is pushed out. You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize gate. On the other hand, in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize winning port door is in the ON state, the special prize winning port door opens the big prize winning port, making it easier for the game ball to enter the big prize winning port. Become.

When game balls enter the big winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game balls enter the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game balls enter the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering a game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also called "winning". In particular, winning a prize to a starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening starting opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display device 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs variable display of normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all the LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal patterns is also called a normal pattern game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the left side of the image display device 5 . Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, the normal game is executed.

Above the normal pattern display 20, a normal pattern holding display 25C is provided. The general pattern suspension display 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal pattern suspension storage number, which is the number of general pattern games whose execution is suspended, by the number of lit LEDs.

The surface of the game board 2 is provided with, in addition to the above structure, a windmill for changing the flowing direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the game area, an out port is provided for taking in game balls that have not entered any of the winning ports.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the game machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 for game effects is provided at the periphery of the game area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates according to the performance is provided.

A ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 operated by a player or the like to shoot a game ball toward the game area from the ball shooting device is provided at the lower right portion of the game machine frame 3 .

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent from a predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be supplied to the ball shooting device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply plate (upper plate). Below the upper plate, there is provided a batted ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are dispensed when the upper plate is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, there is provided a push button 31B that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

The pachinko game machine 1 is provided with a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B as detection means for detecting actions (operations, etc.) of the player, but detection means other than these may be provided.

(Outline of Progress of Game) A game ball is shot toward the game area by a player's rotation operation to the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1 . When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, the normal pattern display device 20 starts the normal pattern game. In addition, when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during the execution of the previous normal game (when the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 but the normal game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately) , the normal game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In this normal pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (normal pattern per pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern per pattern". On the other hand, if a normal pattern (normal pattern losing pattern) other than the normal pattern per pattern is stop-displayed as the determined normal pattern, the display result of the normal pattern becomes "normal pattern losing". When it comes to "normal game", the variable winning ball device 6B is opened for a predetermined period of time and the opening control is performed (the second start winning opening is opened).

When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, when the game ball enters (wins) the start winning opening during the period during which the special game is running, or during the period when it is controlled to the big win game state or the small win game state described later (although the start win has occurred If the special game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special game based on the entry is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special symbol game, if a specific special symbol (a big hit symbol, for example, "7", the actual symbol differs depending on the type of the big hit described below) is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol, it becomes a "big win" and a big winning symbol. If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example, "2") different from the symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Also, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, "-") different from the big-hit symbol or the small-hit symbol is stop-displayed, it becomes "losing".

After the display result in the special game becomes "big win", the game is controlled to a big win game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special game becomes "minor win", it is controlled to the small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is the timing of the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) and the timing until the number of game balls entering the big winning opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9). It will continue until whichever comes first. The predetermined period is an upper limit period during which the big winning slot can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as an upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big winning opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeatedly executed until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can get a prize ball by entering the game ball into the big winning hole. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The larger the number of rounds in the jackpot game state and the longer the upper limit period of opening, the more advantageous the player is.

In addition, a jackpot type is set in the "jackpot". For example, a plurality of types of opening modes (number of rounds and upper limit period of opening) of the big winning opening and game states after the jackpot game state (normal state, time saving state, variable probability state, etc. described later) are prepared, and the jackpot is obtained according to these. type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type in which a large number of prize balls can be obtained, and a jackpot type in which a small number of prize balls or almost no prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small winning game state, the same opening mode as the big winning game state when some jackpot types etc.), the big prize opening is opened. In addition, you may provide a small-hit classification also in a "small-hit" like a big-hit classification.

After the jackpot game state is finished, depending on the jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time-saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time saving state, the control (time saving control) that shortens the average special figure fluctuation time (period of varying the special figure) than the normal state is executed. In the time-saving state, by shortening the average normal figure fluctuation time (the period during which the normal figure is changed) than in the normal state, and by improving the probability of becoming a "normal figure hit" in the general figure game than in the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. Since the time-saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbols) is improved, it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time-saving control, the variable probability control in which the probability that the display result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state is executed. The variable probability state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols is improved, and in addition, a "big hit" is likely to occur, so it is a further advantageous state for the player.

The time saving state and the variable probability state are continued until one of the end conditions such as execution of the special game for a predetermined number of times and start of the next big win game state is established first. The end condition that the special figure game of a predetermined number of times has been executed is also referred to as a number cut (number cut time reduction, number cut probability variable, etc.).

The normal state means a game state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, a variable probability state, etc., and the display result in the normal game is "normal game". The pachinko gaming machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", returns to the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when the system is reset, a predetermined return after power-on) It is the state controlled in the same way as when processing is not executed).

The state in which probability variable control is executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not executed is also called a low probability state. A state in which time-saving control is performed is also referred to as a high-based state, and a state in which time-saving control is not performed is also referred to as a low-based state. Combining these, the short-time state is also called a low-probability-high base state, the probability-variable state is a high-probability-high base state, and the normal state is a low-probability-low base state. The high probability state and the low base state are also referred to as the high probability low base state.

After the small win game state is over, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special figure game becomes "small win" is continuously controlled (however, "small win" occurs). If the special game at the time is the special game for the predetermined number of times in the above cut, the game state is naturally changed). In addition, there may not be a "small hit" as a display result of a special figure game.

In addition, the game state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, it may be controlled to the probability variable state after the big hit game state.

(Progress of Effect, etc.) In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects such as notifying the progress of the game and exciting the game) are executed in accordance with the progress of the game. The production will be described below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and/or the game effect lamp 9 It may be performed by turning on/off, operation of the movable body 32, or the like.

As an effect executed according to the progress of the game, the first special game or the second In response to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decoration pattern is started. At the timing when the display result (also called fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special game or the second special game, a fixed decorative pattern (combination of three decorative patterns), which is the display result of variable display of decorative patterns, is displayed. ) is also stopped (derived).

During the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end of the variable display, the variable display of the decorative design may be in a predetermined ready-to-win state (ready-to-win state is established). Here, the ready-to-win mode means that when the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of the jackpot combination described later, the decorative symbols that are not stopped and displayed are displayed in a variable manner. It is the aspect that is continuing.

Further, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-described ready-to-win mode during the variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decoration pattern) to the "big win" (also called the "big win reliability" or "big win expectation") depends on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of ready-to-win effects are executed. The ready-to-win performance includes, for example, a normal reach and a super-to-win with higher reliability than the normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "big hit", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration The display result of the variable display of the pattern becomes a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decoration patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stop-displayed together on predetermined effective lines in the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. .

In the case of a ``variable probability big hit'' controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the big win game state, odd decorative patterns (for example, "7" etc.) are stopped and displayed together, and the variable probability state is entered after the end of the big win game state. In the case of an uncontrolled "non-probability variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6") may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative patterns are also called probability variable patterns and even-numbered decorative patterns are also called non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After becoming a ready-to-win mode with non-probability variation symbols, a promotion performance may be executed to finally become a "probability variation big hit".

When the display result of the special figure game is "small hit", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1, 3, 5", etc.) are derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "minor hit"). As an example, decoration symbols constituting a chance eye are stopped and displayed on predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle” and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special game is a "big hit" of some jackpot types (jackpot types in the same manner as the small win game state), and when it becomes a "minor hit" , a common fixed decoration pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special game is "Loss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" Also referred to as "non-reach loss".) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes "non-reach loss"). In addition, when the display result is "losing", after the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined ready-to-win combination ("reach losing") that is not a big hit combination. (Also called) fixed decorative pattern is displayed stop (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is "reach lost").

The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (suspended display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display during execution and a pre-reading notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big win in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is suspended). As the pre-reading advance notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the display corresponding to the variable display (suspended display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

Also, in the image display device 5, the decorative patterns are temporarily stopped during the variable display of the decorative patterns, and then the variable display is restarted, so that one variable display is simulated as a plurality of variable displays. A pseudo continuous effect may be executed.

During the big winning game state, the performance during the big winning is executed to report the big winning game state. As the effect during the big win, the effect of notifying the number of rounds or the promotion effect indicating that the value of the big win game state is improved may be executed. Also, during the small-hit game state, an effect during the small-hit game for notifying the small-hit game state is executed. It should be noted that during the small winning game state, some of the jackpot types (jackpot types in the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small hit game state, for example, the jackpot type in the subsequent game state high probability state) jackpot game By executing a common performance in both states, the player may not know whether the current state is a small win game state or a big win game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small winning game state and after the end of the big winning game state, it is made impossible to distinguish whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. may

Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board Configuration) The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like as shown in FIG. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are arranged on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 .

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of suspension), execution of a general-purpose game (including management of suspension), jackpot game state, small hit game state, game state, etc.) has a function to control. The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104 and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105 .

The CPU 103 executes a program stored in the ROM 101 to perform processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main substrate 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, effect control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM that retains stored contents for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped in part or in its entirety. All or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be developed in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102 .

The random number circuit 104 counts updatably numerical data representing various random numbers (game random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The game random numbers may be updated (updated by software) when the CPU 103 executes a predetermined computer program.

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first reservation It includes an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the indicator 25A, the second hold indicator 25B, the normal figure hold indicator 25C, and a solenoid drive signal).

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals from various switches (gate switch 21, starting switch (first starting switch 22A and second starting switch 22B), count switch 23) for detecting game balls A detection signal indicating that the switch has been turned on by entering) is captured and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

Solenoid circuit 111, a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82), to the solenoid 81 for normal electric accessories and the solenoid 82 for the big winning entrance door transmit.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100), as part of the control of the progress of the game, produces a production control command (a command to specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game. 12. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. - 特許庁The effect control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, the display result of the special game (including the jackpot type), the variation pattern used when executing the special game (details will be described later). )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big winning slots, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, game status), commands specifying error occurrence, and the like.

The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the effect control command, and produces effects based on the received effect control command (various effects according to the progress of the game, (including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, power failure recovery notification, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute a process for executing the effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above function of the effect control board 12, and the effect to be executed (including the decision, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on the detection signal from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by the player is detected and appropriately indicates the operation content). The controller 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes an effect based on an effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120 .

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on the performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120 . The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on/off the game effect lamp 9 . Also, it supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 . Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a driving circuit for driving the movable body 32 .

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, and turns on/off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signal. do. In this manner, the display control unit 123 controls sound output and lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

The effect control CPU 120 executes voice output, lamp lighting/extinguishing control (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do so.

The random number circuit 124 counts updatably numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used for executing various effects. The effect random number may be updated by effect control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

I / O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 has an input port for taking in production control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). and an output port of

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko game machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(Operation) Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11) First, main operations of the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes the game control main process. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main substrate 11. As shown in FIG.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). Initial settings include stack pointer setting, internal device register setting (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), setting to make RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3). The clear switch is mounted, for example, on the power board. When the clear switch is turned on and the power is turned on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 through the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is ON (step S3; Yes), initialization processing (step S8) is executed. In the initialization processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates initialization to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power failure), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes inoperable due to the stoppage of the power supply. In this process when the power supply is stopped, a process of turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process of the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes adding an error detection code (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes not only various data (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.) for progressing the game, but also the states of the backup flags and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the backed up data (using an error detection code) to determine whether the data is normal (step S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, so initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs recovery processing (step S6) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the game state at the time of stopping the power supply is restored, and when the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols is resumed from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. will be

And CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 (step S7). In accordance with this, an effect control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that is backed up, and if the special game is being executed, the effect control that specifies the display result of the special game that is being executed You may make it transmit a command. These commands can use the same commands as the commands set for transmission in the special symbol process described later. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command specifying the restoration time from the power failure, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power failure has been restored or is being restored from the power failure. Display the screen for The effect control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

After completing the recovery process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes the random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and the interrupt is permitted (step S12 ). After that, loop processing is entered. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the timer interrupt process for game control shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby, through the switch circuit 110, the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port. It is determined whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrences of jackpots, etc.), start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of wins, etc.), probability change information (information indicating the number of times the odd state has occurred, etc.) is output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). After that, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process (step S25). CPU103 by executing the special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the big hit game state and small hit game state, control of the game state, etc. are realized (details later).

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). By the CPU 103 executing normal symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, management of execution and suspension of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41), It is possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal game hit". The execution of the normal pattern game is performed by driving the normal pattern display device 20, and the normal pattern reservation number is displayed by lighting the normal pattern reservation display device 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when power failure occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, and the like may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the processes described above. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to the sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, after permitting the interrupt, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 5 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, the occurrence of starting winning is detected, and the process of storing the pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 and updating the pending storage number is executed. When a starting prize is generated, a random number value for determining the display result (including the jackpot type) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process of prefetching and judging a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, the transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command for designating the determination result such as the generation of the start winning, the number of pending memories, and the prefetch determination to the effect control board 12 is performed. . The effect control command at the time of starting winning thus set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. is transmitted to

After executing the starting prize determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission setting for transmitting the effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 is performed.

The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of pending information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small hit", and the type of the big hit in the case of "big hit". is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal process, a fixed special symbol (any one of a big hit symbol, a small winning symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set according to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal process ends. In addition, the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also called special figure 2 priority digestion). Also, the winning order of the game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the condition for starting the special game may be established in the order of winning (also called winning order).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) are referred to. Other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12 are the same. Various tables are stored in the ROM 121 of the effect control board 12 .

The variation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this variation pattern setting process, one of a plurality of variation patterns is selected using random numbers for determining the variation pattern based on the result of pre-determination as to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "small hit." including the process of determining In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern is the execution time of the special game (special figure fluctuation time) (also the execution time of variable display of decorative patterns), the form of variable display of decorative patterns (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the variable display of decorative patterns. It specifies the content of the production (type of reach production, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation processing includes a process of setting for varying the special symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Also, it is determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3", and the special symbol variation processing ends.

The special symbol stop processing of step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stop processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B stop the variation of the special symbol, and stop display (derivate) the fixed special symbol which is the display result of the special symbol. It includes a process to set for Then, when the display result is "big hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "losing", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "losing", when it is controlled to the time saving state or the probability variable state, and when the end of the number cut is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing of step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing for making settings for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot game state and opening the jackpot, based on the fact that the display result is "jackpot". is When opening the big winning opening, a process of supplying a solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an upper limit opening period for opening the big winning opening and an upper limit execution number of rounds are set according to the type of the jackpot. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the big hit opening pretreatment is completed.

The process during jackpot opening of step S115 is performed when the value of a special figure process flag is "5". In this process during the opening of the big win, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning hole, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the big winning hole is counted. It includes processing for determining whether or not it is time to return from the open state to the closed state. Then, when returning the large winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The process during jackpot opening is terminated.

The jackpot opening post-processing of step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening post-processing includes processing for determining whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions, and processing for judging whether or not the number of executions of rounds in which the jackpot is opened has reached a set upper limit number of executions. It includes processing to make settings for terminating . Then, when the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round reaches the upper limit number of executions, the special process flag The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot end processing includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending production is executed as a production operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. It includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time saving control. When such setting is performed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

Small hit opening pretreatment of step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small hit opening pre-processing includes a process of setting to open the big winning opening in the small win game state based on the display result being "small win". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit opening preprocessing ends.

Small hit during opening processing of step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". In this process during opening of the small prize, there is a process of measuring the elapsed time from opening the big winning opening, and the timing of returning the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. It includes processing for determining whether or not When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small winning game state comes, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10", and the small winning open processing is ended.

Small hit end processing of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small-hit end processing includes processing of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period in which the performance operation for informing the end of the small-hit game state is executed elapses. Here, when the small winning game state ends, the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 before entering the small winning game state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has passed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning end processing ends.

(Main Actions of Effect Control Board 12) Next, main actions of the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and the effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 6 is executed. When the production control main processing shown in FIG. Perform register setting of the mounted CTC (counter/timer circuit). Also, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial motion control process, control for initial motion of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return it to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined motion, is executed.

After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is turned on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to ON every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeated and waits.

Also, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that occurs each time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is an interrupt generated when, for example, the effect control INT signal from the main substrate 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt prohibition, but when using a CPU that does not automatically enter an interrupt prohibition state, interrupt It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to the interruption caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, the effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port for receiving the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I/O 125 . The effect control command taken in at this time is stored in the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt process after setting the interrupt permission.

If the timer interrupt flag is ON at step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to be turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands that are transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control command Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the read production control command is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 so that the content specified by the production control command can be confirmed by the production control process processing or the like. It turns on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32 Control to operate various production devices such as driving operation of is performed. Further, determination, determination, setting, and the like are performed according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main substrate 11 regarding the control contents of the effect operation using various effect devices.

Random number update processing for production|presentation is performed following the production|presentation control process processing of step S76 (step S77), and at least one part of the random number for production|presentation used by the production|presentation control board 12 side is updated by software. After that, the process returns to step S73. Other processing may be performed before returning to the processing of step S73.

FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process processing. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a pre-reading notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main substrate 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed. Also, a process for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the effect control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processes of steps S170 to S177 as described below according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command designating the start of variable display has been received from the main substrate 11. and so on. When it is determined to start the variable display of the decoration pattern on the image display device 5, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is terminated.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and the variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the form of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the ready-to-win effect, and various other Whether or not to execute various effects such as advance notice effects, its mode, execution start timing, etc. are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. After that, based on the set effect control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of the decorative design in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of the decorative design.

The effect process during variable display in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display the effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32, outputting voices and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting commands (sound effect signals) to the voice control board 13, and outputting commands (illumination signals) to the lamp control board 14. Various effects are controlled during the variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/blinking the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by output. After performing such effect control, for example, an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern is read from the effect control pattern, or a command designating to stop display of the fixed decorative pattern is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to the fact that the player has done so, the fixed decoration pattern which becomes the display result of the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decoration pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the production process during variable display ends.

The special figure per waiting process of step S173 is a process executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command designating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state is received from the main substrate 11 . Then, when receiving the production control command designating the start of the jackpot game state or the small hit game state, if the command designates the start of the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command designates the start of the small-hit game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the small-hit production process. Also, when the waiting time for receiving the command has passed without receiving a command designating the start of the big win game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game was "losing". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to "0" which is the initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the special figure per waiting process is terminated.

The production process during the small hit of step S174 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "4". In this small-hit mid-performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small-hit game state, and executes various performance controls in the small-hit game state based on the set content. . Further, in the small-hit middle production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the small-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small-hit end production. It is updated to a certain "5", and the effect processing during the small hit is ended.

The small hit end production process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the production control process flag is "5". In this small hit end effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, etc., and various effect control at the end of the small win game state based on the setting content. to run. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the small winning end effect process is terminated.

The effect process during the big hit in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "6". In this big-hit production process, the production control CPU 120 sets, for example, production control patterns corresponding to the production contents in the big-hit game state, and executes various production controls in the big-hit game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big-hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command designating to end the big-hit game state from the main board 11, the value of the production control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the ending production process. 7", and the effect processing during the big hit is finished.

The ending effect process of step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, effect control patterns corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, etc., and controls various effects of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Run. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value of "0", and the ending effect process is terminated.

(Modifications of Basic Description) The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winning, but the game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winning. It may be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the relevant pattern. Further, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as the gaming machine, but medals are inserted to set a predetermined number of bets. A slot machine capable of executing a game (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as a slot machine equipped with one or more bonuses, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to being distributed/provided on a detachable recording medium to a computer device or the like included in the pachinko game machine 1. It may be distributed by being installed in a storage device possessed by the software. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from another device on the network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a detachable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in an internal memory or the like. Alternatively, it may be directly executed using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions for comparing various ratios such as the execution ratio of effects (expressions such as “high”, “low”, “different”) indicate that one is a ratio of “0%”. may contain. For example, the ratio of one is "0%" and the other is "100%" or less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Portion 31AK) Next, the characteristic portion 31AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining variation patterns and types of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8A, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern does not become the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". , The variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the ready-to-win mode, and the display result is "losing". Variation patterns PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. are prepared.

Further, as shown in FIG. 8B, in the present embodiment, ready-to-win effects such as normal reach and super-to-win A to E are executed. In this embodiment, the ready-to-win effect is also referred to as a suggestive effect suggesting that the jackpot state is controlled. The reliability (jackpot reliability) when each reach is executed is normal reach < super reach E < super reach D < super reach C < super reach B, as represented by the number of black stars in FIG. <It becomes higher in the order of super reach A.> In addition, you may provide the reach which confirms that it will become a big hit.

In this embodiment, super reach is performed via normal reach. Further, during the ready-to-win effect of the super reach, there is a case where a developing effect to develop (promote) to a more reliable reach is executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc. and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc. shown in FIG. 8A are variation patterns corresponding to execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 8A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops to super reach, which is one level higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability level develops by two levels or more is also provided. Also, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed multiple times may be provided.

In this embodiment, except for the normal reach which has the lowest reliability, the title of the reach is announced at a predetermined timing after establishment of the reach. As shown in FIG. 8B, the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of reach. Specifically, for the super reach E, which has the lowest reliability among the super reach, the title of the reach is notified only by display, and for the other super reach, the title is notified by display and sound. In this way, the title notification is executed by more production devices for reach with a high degree of reliability than for reach with a low degree of reliability. As a result, it is possible to effectively arouse the player's sense of anticipation, thereby improving the performance effect. Note that the notification mode of the title may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or not depending on the reliability. Also, even in the same ready-to-win effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Also, the font (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) and typeface (linear script, square script, etc.) of title characters may be changed according to the type of reach.

The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to indicating the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may indicate the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the reach effect, and the like.

(Example of Effect Operation of Characteristic Portion 31AK) Next, an example of effect operation in the present embodiment will be described. The following production operations are executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main substrate 11. FIG. 9 and 10 are diagrams showing an example of the effect operation of super reach in the present embodiment. FIG. 9(A) shows that variable display of decorative patterns is performed in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R of the image display device 5. FIG. . After that, for example, as shown in FIG. 9(B), the decorative symbols showing the numbers 7 on the "left" and "right" stops and the ready-to-win state is entered. After that, the production branches according to the type of reach.

(Super Reach A) In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 9C, the image display device 5 displays the character 31AK001, which is an ally character, and the Reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. After a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as when the introductory portion of the ready-to-reach effect (also referred to as super ready-to-win effect) ends, the entire screen of the image display device 5 appears as shown in FIG. 9(D). , the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the characters "SP Reach A") is displayed, and the sound corresponding to the Reach title name (here, "Super Reach A") is output from the speaker 8. , Super Reach A are announced. After that, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is erased, and as shown in FIG. The subsequent part of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win A is executed. A production in which characters confront each other is also called a battle production. In the battle production, if an ally character wins, it becomes a big hit, and if the ally character is defeated, it becomes a loss.

It should be noted that when the lines are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super ready-to-win effect, a sound corresponding to the lines may be output from the speaker 8 . In addition, the words are not limited to being displayed in balloons as shown in FIG.

(Super reach B) In the case of super reach B, as shown in FIG. 9C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 to start the reach effect. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period of time elapses after the start of the super ready-to-win effect, such as the end of the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect, as shown in FIG. , characters of "SP reach B") are displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of reach (here, "super reach B") is output from the speaker 8, thereby announcing the title of super reach B. be. After that, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is deleted, and as shown in FIG. The subsequent part of the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win B is executed.

In this way, in super ready-to-win A and super ready-to-win B, the title of ready-to-win is reported when a predetermined period has passed since the start of the super ready-to-win effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super ready-to-win effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

Also, in Super Reach A (Fig. 9 (C) → (D) → (E) ...) and Super Reach B (Fig. 9 (C) → (F) → (G) ...), the title is In the introductory part until the notification is given, the super ready-to-win effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 9(C)). By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to which super reach will be achieved after the start of the super reach effect and which title will be announced. In super reach A and super reach B, it is not limited to making the production mode until the title is announced completely common, but at least one You may make it make the part into a common production mode. For example, in the introductory portion of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a Super Reach production (for example, a production that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) is executed in a manner related to the title notified after that. can be By doing so, the performance effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the performance. In this way, the title notification may be executed after making it possible to specify which super reach is to be achieved.

(Super reach D) In the case of super reach D, as shown in FIG. ) is displayed, and a voice corresponding to the title name of Reach (here, "Kill the enemy") is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach D is announced. In this way, in super reach D, the title is announced at the start of the super reach effect. Further, under the title 31AK007, an expectation level suggestion display 31AK008 that suggests the level of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 9(H). Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation for a big hit, but it does not have to be completely consistent with the degree of reliability of the reach.

It should be noted that the voice notification of Super Reach D is not to notify the title name as it is, but to notify the contents of Reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the notification mode of title notification by sound is varied depending on the type of reach. As a result, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

After the title is announced in Super Reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 9(I). At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation suggestive display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach performance. In addition, FIG. 9(I) shows the effect contents common to FIG. 9(C) (super reach A, super reach B), but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D may be executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 9(J), character 31AK009, which is an enemy character, is displayed, dialogue 31AK004 of character 31AK001 is displayed, and a super reach D reach effect is executed in which character 31AK001 and character 31AK009 confront each other. be.

(Super reach E) In the case of super reach E, as shown in FIG. ) is displayed, the title of Super Reach E is announced. Note that in Super Reach E, the title is not announced by voice. In addition, along with the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the enemy character 31AK011 are displayed, the line 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, and the reach effect of the super reach E in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011 confront each other is performed. executed. In this way, in Super Ready-to-Wear E, titles are announced together with the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In super reach E, the title 31AK010 continues to be displayed during the reach effect.

In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win E with low reliability of big hit, the title is notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win performance, thereby preventing the player from having excessive expectations. On the other hand, in the reach effects of super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is announced (Fig. 9 (D), (F), ( H)). By doing so, the title notification can be executed in accordance with the super ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that the title notification may be performed without stopping the progress of the reach even in the super reach performance such as the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D. Contrary to this embodiment, in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win with high reliability of big win, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the ready-to-win effect. In the ready-to-win performance of super ready-to-win with low reliability of big win, the progress of the ready-to-win performance may be stopped and the title may be announced.

(Title Announcement Timing) As described above, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, the title is announced after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of the super reach effect, and super reach D and super reach E are announced. In , the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified after a predetermined period has passed after the start of super reach performance, and super reach D and super reach D with low reliability of big hit are announced. In E, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, but in the case of reach with high reliability of big hit, the title is notified at the start of super reach production, and in the case of reach with low reliability of big hit, super. The title may be announced after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the ready-to-win effect.

(Title display area) In addition, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, the title is announced in the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in super reach D and super reach E , the title is announced in a part (second area) of the screen of the image display device 5 . By doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, when the hit reliability is high, title notification is performed in a wider display area than when the reliability is low, so effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be displayed in a size that fits in the entire screen, or the title may be displayed on the entire background as a background for title notification. It may be a thing (title notification using the entire screen) or the like. In addition, the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach A and super reach B, and the display areas for title notification may be differentiated between super reach D and super reach E.

The method of differentiating the display area for title notification according to the ready-to-win effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for title notification may be arbitrarily changed according to the ready-to-win effect. For example, when the hit reliability is high, the title notification may be performed in a narrower display area than when the reliability is low. Further, when the display area for title notification is changed according to the ready-to-win effect, the display area may be changed as in this embodiment, or the display location may be changed.

(Expectation Suggestion Display) In this embodiment, in the title notification in super reach A and super reach B, which have a high degree of reliability of the big hit, the expectation degree suggestion display is not displayed, and the reliability of the big hit is higher than that of the super reach A and the super reach B. In the title announcement in super reach D, which has a low level, an expectation level suggestion display is displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the production from becoming repetitive. In addition, in the title announcement in the super reach E, which has a lower hit reliability than the super reach D, the expectation suggestive display is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing his sense of expectation due to the display of the expectation suggesting display indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with the low reliability. At least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E may display the expectation level suggestion display.

It should be noted that, as shown in FIG. 9(H), the indication indicating the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars. You may make it display the numerical value which carried out. In addition, as shown in FIG. 9H and the like, in the case of indicating by the number of black stars, half of the black stars may be displayed to increase the number of levels of expectations.

(Title Display End Timing) Also, in this embodiment, in super reach A and super reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and the super reach effect is executed. As a result, in the super reach A and the super reach B, attention can be paid to the reach effect. Also, in super reach D and super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title continues to be displayed until a final effect, which will be described later, is executed. As a result, in super reach D and super reach E, the type of reach can be grasped even during the super reach performance. Further, by doing so, the title notification can be executed according to the ready-to-win effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. Note that the display end timing of the title can be changed arbitrarily because the effect can be improved at any time.

In addition, although the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted here, for example, title notification and expectation suggestive display according to the reliability of the big hit may be executed.

(Determining Effect) After each ready-to-win effect is executed, at the timing of deriving the display result (at the end of the variable display), a definite effect for informing whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. . The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is a "loss". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10(B), an effect is executed in which an image 31AK012 is displayed on the image display device 5 . After that, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the friendly character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. A fixed decoration pattern is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the friendly character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

In this embodiment, even if the title is continuously notified during the ready-to-win effect, the title notification is finished before the final effect is executed. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the decided effect, and to perform a well-balanced title notification.

In the production operation examples shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, during the ready-to-win production of super ready-to-win, the decoration pattern is reduced in the lower right part of the image display device 5 to execute variable display, but during the ready-to-win production. The display of the decorative pattern may be arbitrary. For example, the decoration pattern may not be displayed during the ready-to-win effect, or the display mode (size, position, shade, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of ready-to-win effect.

In addition, when displaying characters permanently displayed during pending display, active display, variable display, and display related to cellphone interlocking on the image display device 5, they are not displayed appropriately during the ready-to-win effect of super reach in order to draw attention to the ready-to-win effect. may be At that time, during low-reliability ready-to-win effects such as super ready-to-win E, these displays may remain displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from having excessive expectations due to the low-reliability ready-to-win effect, and to make the player pay attention to the ready-to-win effect in the highly-reliable ready-to-win effect.

(Development Effect) Next, an example of the effect operation when the development effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 11(A), when the development effect is executed while the ready-to-reach effect of super reach D is being executed (the title notification of super reach D is being executed), as shown in FIG. As shown, the ready-to-win effect is interrupted and an effect is executed in which the screen is torn. After that, when it develops to super reach A, as shown in FIG. 11(C), the title of super reach A is announced, and the reach performance of super reach A is executed. In the case of developing into super reach B, as shown in FIG. 11(D), the title of super reach B is notified, and the reach effect of super reach is executed. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. As shown in FIG. 11, when the destination reach is a reach in which title notification is performed by display and sound, the title notification is performed again by display and sound.

Note that the development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 11(B), and it may be a effect such that the screen gradually cracks and breaks, or a sandstorm (display of malfunction) is displayed. You may do so. By setting it as such production|presentation, an unexpected production|presentation can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a fake development production such as a production in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation Level Suggestion Effect) In the production operation example shown in FIG. It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect of suggesting the level of expectation by displaying the stars and turning them into black stars in stages.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12(A), when announcing the title of Super Reach D, an expectation suggestive display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed first. Then, as shown in FIG. 12B, a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation suggestive display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. A production that fits in one of the white stars is executed. At this time, the speaker 8 outputs a sound "pin" indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, tone quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed stepwise each time it is repeated (every number of stars). At the stage where the number of black stars corresponding to the level of expectation fits in the level of expectation suggestive display 31AK021, the black stars are highlighted by shining as shown in FIG. 12(F). By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation level suggesting effect has ended.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12A to 12F, black stars are displayed one by one and the expectation level indicated by the expectation level suggestion display is raised one step at a time, but two or more black stars are displayed. It may be displayed so that the degree of expectation rises by two or more levels. Alternatively, a half black star may be displayed to raise the expectation level by half. In this case, different sounds or the same sound may be output according to the number of stars displayed (the number of levels of rising expectations). For example, the same sound may be output when half black stars are displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Moreover, there may be a case where the sound is not output. By doing so, the expectation degree suggesting effects are diversified, and the effects of the effects are improved. In addition, the same black star image will be displayed regardless of the number of stages of expectations that increase at once, and the black stars will increase according to the number of stages of expectations that will increase. You may make it perform the production|presentation which does.

(Production Mode) There may be a plurality of production modes in the production device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even when the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main substrate 11, the effect based on the command is executed in different effect modes. In each production mode, the background displayed on the image display device 5, the character, the motif, the sound output from the speaker 8, etc. may be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or the game state, or may be changed by the player's operation.

FIGS. 12G to 12L show an example of the effect operation of the title notification and the degree-of-expectation effect in the special mode when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the effect modes. In the normal mode, title notification and expectation suggesting effects are executed as shown in FIGS. In the special mode, the ready-to-reach performance based on the variation pattern of super ready-to-reach D is the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-reach D2 that is different from the ready-to-reach performance of super ready-to-win D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of super reach D is designated, title 31AK023 of super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 12(G). At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of READY is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from that in the normal mode (for example, a sound with a different tone) is output. Also, the expectation level suggestion display 31AK024 in super reach D2 is not star-shaped but diamond-shaped.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12(H), a black rhombus 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation suggestive display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. The effect is executed so that it fits in one of the white rhombuses. At this time, a sound "pong" is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black rhombus indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 12(J) and (K), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of reach. At the stage where the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation has settled in the expectation suggestive display 31AK024, the black rhombuses are highlighted in such a manner that they shine, as shown in FIG. 12(L). In this way, by varying the notification mode of the title according to the effect mode (state when the ready-to-win effect is executed) determined according to the player's selection, the game state, etc., the effect is diversified and the effect is enhanced. improves.

FIG. 12 shows an example of the effect operation when the super reach D variation pattern is specified, but depending on the effect mode (state when the reach effect is executed), other reach effect ) may be made to have different presentation modes. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the ready-to-win effect is executed), whether or not to report the title of ready-to-win, and the execution ratio of the title to be reported may be varied. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the title of ready-to-win may not be announced. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the taste of the player, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

In this embodiment, the expectation level is suggested by the number of black stars in the expectation level indication display, and the expectation level suggestion effect is executed to gradually increase the number of black stars. It is also possible to execute an expectation level suggesting effect in which the number of displays suggesting is gradually reduced. Such an expectation level suggesting effect may be executed in addition to the expectation level suggesting effect of this embodiment, or may be executed instead.

(Another example of development effect) In the case of executing the expectation level suggesting effect in which the display indicating the expectation level of the expectation level suggesting display is increased step by step, the development effect is executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation level. can be In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed all at once instead of step by step. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(A), the title Super Reach D is notified, and after completing the effect of increasing the number of black stars in stages, as shown in FIG. A development effect in which the image 31AK031 is displayed is executed. Here, when an operation to the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. The title of Reach C is announced. In this way, when the development effect is executed, the title notification of the development source reach is switched to the title notification of the development destination reach, so that it becomes easy to understand which reach has developed. Under the title 31AK032, an expectation suggestive display 31AK033 with three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. It should be noted that after the movable body 32 has moved, it is also possible to execute a development effect in which the title and the expectation suggestive display are changed.

(Forecast Effect) In this embodiment, as the forewarning effect, a title notice for notifying the degree of reliability of a big hit is executed according to the notification mode of the title (for example, the display color of the title, etc.). For example, as shown in FIG. 14(A), the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title name of Reach A is output from the speaker 8, thereby announcing the title of Super Reach A. After that, as shown in FIG. 14(B), a title announcement is executed in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red. Thus, the title is displayed in black when the title announcement is not performed, and the title is displayed in a color other than black when the title announcement is performed. In the title announcement shown in FIG. 14, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the title of Reach is notified by voice. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Note that the timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of display of the title.

Further, when a title announcement is executed in which the display mode (display color) of the title is changed, after the display mode of the title is changed, a sound corresponding to the display mode after the change may be output. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the effect of the advance notice effect. Also, the title notification by voice may be executed after the display mode (display color) of the title is changed. In this case, the sound may be output according to the display mode (display color) of the changed title.

(Execution Timing of Title Notification) It is preferable to execute the notification of the title in the ready-to-win state at a time other than the execution timing of the performance (specific performance), such as the advance performance or the development performance, where the degree of expectation of being controlled to be in an advantageous state for the big win is improved. By doing so, once the title is announced, an effect that raises the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's sense of expectation can be maintained.

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing an example of the announcement effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute the announcement effect and the effect mode. The advance notice effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 within the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the advance notice effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is the super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001).

If it is a super reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the super reach title (whether or not to execute a title announcement) is determined (step 31AKS002).

In step 31AKS002, the display color of the super ready-to-win title is determined according to whether the display result is a "big hit" or a "losing", for example, according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(A). As shown in FIG. 16A, the display color of the super reach title is "black", "red", one that changes from "black" to "red", and one that changes from "black" to "fruit pattern". , and those that change from "red" to "fruit pattern" are provided, and the reliability of the big hit increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the title. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the title, and the presentation effect will be improved.

In addition, the "fruit pattern" may be displayed in bold and the characters themselves may be "fruit pattern", or the background portion of the title display area may be "fruit pattern". . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color that changes, the display color may change after the title notification is executed, as shown in FIG. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes. Also, since the title display period differs depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes may differ depending on the type of super reach. In the case of a super reach that has a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of change timings may be provided and one of the change timings may be determined. In the case of super reach with a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or less than in super reach with a long title display period.

When there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, in the normal mode the display color of the title is determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. Determines the display color of the title in different proportions. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. In this way, by varying the manner of execution of the title announcement (display color and display color change timing) depending on the presentation mode, the presentation is diversified and the presentation effect is improved.

In this embodiment, as the advance notice effect, the advance notice of the big hit reliability is executed according to the display mode of the character's words (for example, the display color of the words, etc.) in the ready-to-win effect of the super reach.

After determining the display color of the title of super ready-to-win, the display color of the character's words in the ready-to-win effect of super ready-to-win (whether or not to execute advance notice of the words) is decided (step 31AKS003).

In step 31AKS003, depending on whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing", the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect is determined, for example, by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16(C). As shown in FIG. 16(C), the display colors of the words in the ready-to-win effect are "white", "red", and those that change from "white" to "red", in this order (ascending order). Reliability is high. That is, the reliability of the big win differs depending on the timing of changing the display color of the words. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the change timing of the display color of the words, and the production effect will be improved. As for the display color changing, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. For the object whose display color changes, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the big win reliability may be varied according to the timing at which the display color changes.

Also, the reliability of the big win may be different depending on the combination of the effect modes of the title notice and the dialogue notice. For example, when the same effect mode (display color) is included in the title notice and the dialogue notice, the reliability of the big win may be increased when the same effect mode is used. Also, the reliability of the big win may differ depending on the combination of the change timings of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the big win reliability may be higher than when the change timing is different, or the big win reliability may be different depending on which change comes first. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

If there are a normal mode and a special mode as production modes, the special mode may determine the display color of the words at a rate different from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the pattern of display colors and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

It should be noted that, in place of the speech notice, a notice effect for notifying the reliability of the big hit may be executed by a change in the effect mode of the ready-to-win effect. In that case, in the advance notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the reliability of the big win differs according to the change timing.

After determining the display color of the lines in the ready-to-win effect, or when it is determined that the change pattern is not super-ready-to-win (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other advance notice effects and the effect mode are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the decision results in 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step AK31S005), and the advance notice effect decision processing is terminated.

In this embodiment, it is possible to execute the title notice and the dialogue notice in the case of super reach. and at least one of the speech announcement may be made executable. Further, the title notice and the dialogue notice are explained as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 16, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and the determination ratio may be changed according to the type of super reach, for example. By doing so, it is possible to execute the notice effect according to the type of ready-to-win, and the effect of the effect is improved.

In this embodiment, the title notice and the dialogue notice differ in the number of executable rendering modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed). By doing so, the presentation becomes diverse and the presentation effect is enhanced. In the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the number of executable effects may be changed arbitrarily, and the number and types of executable effects may be the same. By doing so, it is possible to execute a notice effect with a sense of unity, and the player can easily grasp the reliability of the big win.

(Action effect) When the effect mode between the title notice and the dialogue notice changes, an effect indicating that the effect mode will change may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5, and an effect effect in which the image affects at least one of the title and the dialogue may be executed. After the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or lines may be changed. The effect mode of effect effect (effect effect image, etc.) may be common to both the title and the dialogue. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or lines does not change even though the action effect is executed. When the action effect is to be executed, whether or not to execute the effect effect, the execution timing, and the mode of effect may be determined based on the determination results relating to the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, depending on the presentation mode of the action presentation, the rate at which the presentation mode of at least one of the title notice and the dialogue notice changes (the rate at which the presentation mode changes due to the action presentation) may be different. It is possible to make the ratio of the dialogue notice and the change of which production mode (the ratio of which effect is applied) different, or the ratio of what color (how many stages) the change is made to be. . By executing such an action effect, the player will pay attention to which of the title or the words will be affected when the action effect image is displayed, thereby improving the effect. In addition, when there are a plurality of production modes, whether or not to execute the action production and the production mode may be determined at different ratios according to the production modes. By doing so, it is possible to execute an action effect corresponding to the effect mode, and the effect of the effect is improved.

As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of either the title or the dialogue is selected according to the effect content of the ready-to-win effect (for example, the action of the character, the effect content in the battle effect, etc.). may change. By doing so, the player will pay attention to the contents of the ready-to-win effect.

The present invention is not limited to the pachinko game machine 1 described in the characteristic portion 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub Liquid Crystal) As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. FIG. Although expressed as a sub-liquid crystal here, the sub-display device may be composed of an organic EL or a dot-matrix LED. The sub-liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or retractable. The sub-liquid crystal executes various effects such as a notice effect and display of a pending display. For example, title notification may be performed in the sub-liquid crystal. When the title is continuously displayed after the title notification as in the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. In this case, after announcing the title on the image display device 5, the sub liquid crystal may display the title and the degree of expectation suggestive display. By doing so, the title and the expectation level suggesting display can be displayed without interfering with the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expectation level suggesting display become easy to understand.

In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of the title of the ready-to-win effect as a suggestive effect has been described. may For example, as a preview effect (for example, a pre-read preview effect), when executing a pre-read zone effect that shifts to a plurality of zones (stages, effect modes, etc.) with different background images and effect modes on the image display device 5, the transitioned zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification of. In the case of presenting a mission ("reach with 7", "annihilate the enemy using a stick controller", etc.) and executing a mission effect that gives the player an advantage when the mission is accomplished, The present invention may be applied to mission title notification.

(Modification 1 of Characteristic Portion 31AK) In the above-described embodiment, when the timing for deriving the display result comes, the determination effect for informing whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed, and then the display result is displayed. was displayed (
10(B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and if a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the win or loss of the battle effect, temporarily stopping the display result, or the like. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the player's operation, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest is improved.

FIGS. 17 and 18 are diagrams showing an example of a super ready-to-win effect operation in a modified example in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is shown according to the operation. As shown in FIG. 17A, after the image display device 5 enters the reach mode, for example, as shown in FIG. Then, as shown in FIGS. 17(C)-(F) and 18(G)-(I), a ready-to-win effect is executed in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 face each other.

Along with the ready-to-win effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 17(C). As a result, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that acceptance of the operation is currently restricted.

In this modified example, a plurality of types of operation effect images are prepared to indicate that an operation effect is to be executed. The reliability of the big win differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, the image indicating that the operation effect will be executed during the ready-to-win effect may change to a more reliable mode.

For example, as shown in FIG. 17D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. change to

After that, as shown in FIG. 18H, a cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. Effect 31AK050 is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

As described above, in this modified example, when the operation effect image changes, an action effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. It should be noted that the operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may differ depending on the type of action effect.

After that, before a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the restriction line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. , a display prompting an operation to pull the stick controller 31A is displayed. Further, at this time, the operation valid period during which the operation to the stick controller 31A is valid.

Here, when an operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 18(L). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. Note that if no operation is detected within a predetermined operation valid period, the image shown in FIG. 18L is automatically displayed.

In this modified example, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images is executed in the order of small button image<large button image<stick image. The reliability of the jackpot is high. Even when an operation performance image with low reliability is displayed, it may change to an operation performance image with high reliability during ready-to-win performance, so that the performance effect is improved and the expectation of the player is increased. can be maintained.

17 and 18 omit the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation. may be executed. The determination of operation effects and operation effect images (whether there is an operation effect, whether there is an operation effect image to be displayed, whether there is an effect effect, etc.) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG.

(Modified Example 2 of Characteristic Portion 31AK) A suggestive display that suggests the degree of expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state may be performed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestive display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestive display may be executed. In the shutter effect, the effect of covering the screen with the shutter display is executed after the start of the variable display. In addition, in the ready-to-win effect, after the ready-to-win effect, an effect to display a ready-to-win title indicating the development destination of the ready-to-win effect is executed. A specific image may be included and displayed when either the shutter display or the reach title display is displayed. The ready-to-win title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

A specific image is an image with a high degree of reliability of a big hit that is displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The multiple types of elements include a banana image as element E1, a melon image as element E2, an apple image as element E3, a watermelon image as element E4, and a strawberry image as element E5. A fruit pattern image composed of these elements E1 to E5 is the specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. Also, the display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 forming the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. Also, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit within the shutter display and the reach title display.

When the shutter performance is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when the ready-to-win title is displayed during execution of the ready-to-win effect, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the reliability of the big win is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. It should be noted that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as the image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the ready-to-win title effect are executed. For example, white image<blue image<red image<fruit pattern image may be prepared in order of the degree of reliability of the big hit (for example, a red shutter or a reach title with red characters). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big win.

When performing the shutter display and the ready-to-win title display, even when the fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits light to notify. The common sound and light emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such shutter display and reach title display are performed, common notification for fruit patterns is executed. Also, in the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the common sound and the specific sound may be partially overlapped in their output periods.

FIG. 19 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 19A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. The shutter image 31AK061 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Further, when the shutter effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. When the closed shutter is opened, as shown in FIG. 19(b), variable display of decorative patterns is started. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left pattern and the right pattern temporarily stops, as shown in FIG. 19(c), the reach state is entered.

Then, as shown in FIG. 19(d), the super ready-to-win effect is started. For example, the variable display is displayed in a small size on the upper right side of the screen, and the character is displayed on the left side of the screen. A reach title image 31AK062 is displayed at the lower right of the screen, and the contents of the super reach to be executed from now on are displayed as a reach title display. The ready-to-win title image 31AK062 displays a fruit pattern image including all of the elements E1 to E5. Also, in the ready-to-win title image 31AK062, characters of "battle ready-to-win" are displayed to indicate that a ready-to-win effect accompanied by a battle effect is to be executed.

Further, when the ready-to-win title effect is executed, the speaker 8 outputs a common sound (melody) and the game effect lamp 9 emits a notification. Furthermore, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) such as "Hot", which indicates that the reliability of the big win is high. Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestive display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in the ready-to-win title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image has been displayed. In addition, although the common sound and the specific sound have been explained in the case where the output periods are completely separated, the output periods may partially overlap.

After that, a battle ready-to-win effect is executed as shown in FIG. 19(e). An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the characters "Battle Victory!" are displayed on the upper left of the screen. It is reported that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle production ends, the screen returns to the variable display screen with the original number patterns. As shown in FIG. 19(f), all the symbols are stopped, and the jackpot symbol of "777" is displayed.

As shown in FIGS. 19(a) and 19(d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 forming the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be preferably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the ready-to-win title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. As a result, it is possible to accurately convey that a fruit pattern image with a high degree of reliability for big wins has been displayed.

Further, the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19(a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19(d). Therefore, attention can be paid to the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062.

Further, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 19(a) and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 19(d) are displayed at different timings. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from becoming difficult to see due to overlapping execution timings.

The determination of the shutter effect (whether or not to use the shutter effect and the mode of effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. In this case, the shutter performance may be determined based on the determination result of the title display color in step 31AKS002 of FIG. For example, when the display color of the title is determined to be a fruit pattern, the fruit pattern shutter effect may be executed more easily. Further, the determination relating to the ready-to-win title effect may also be executed in step 31AKS004 of FIG. 15 together with the determination relating to the shutter effect.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 121IW) Next, the characteristic portion 121IW will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-1 and 20-2, the pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into an outer frame 121IW001a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame, and a game board constituting a game board surface. It is composed of a (gauge board) 2 (see FIG. 1) and a game machine frame (base frame) 121IW003 for supporting and fixing the game board 2 . A game area is formed in the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is shot from a predetermined ball shooting device and hit into the game area. Further, in the game machine frame 121IW003, a glass door frame 121IW003a having a glass window is positioned around the left side between a door open position where the front surface of the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened and a door closed position where the front surface is closed. The game area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 121IW003a, and the game area can be seen through the glass window when the glass door frame 121IW003a is closed.

In addition, the game machine frame 121IW003 can be opened by inserting a door key owned by a store clerk or the like into a lock (not shown) to unlock it. The door frame 121IW003a cannot be opened.

The main board 11 is mounted on the back surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in a state of being housed in a board case 121IW201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. Further, on the main board 11, a setting key 121IW051 for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state, which will be described later, and a setting key 121IW051 for changing set values such as a winning probability of a big hit (ball output rate), which will be described later, in the setting change state. A setting switch 121IW052 functioning as a setting switch is provided.

A setting-switching main body provided with operation units that can be operated by a player, such as the setting key 121IW051 and the setting-switching switch 121IW052, is accommodated in the board case 121IW201 together with the main board 11. The setting key 121IW051 and the setting-switching switch 121IW052 are exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear right portion of the substrate case 121IW201 so that operation can be performed without opening the substrate case 121IW201.

Since the substrate case 121IW201 having the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 52 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is impossible to operate from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 when the game machine frame 3 is closed. It is possible to operate by opening the game machine frame 3 using a predetermined door key. Also, since the setting key 121IW051 requires operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like of the game arcade, only the store clerk possessing the setting key can operate it. The setting key 121IW051 is also a switch capable of switching between ON and OFF, which will be described later. In addition, in the characterizing portion 121IW, the door key and the setting key are separate keys, but one key may be used for both.

Further, a display monitor 121IW029 and a display changeover switch 121IW030 for switching the display of the display monitor 121IW029 are arranged in the substrate case 121IW201. The display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are connected to the main board 11 and arranged in the upper left part of the board case 121IW201. That is, the display monitor 121IW029 and the display changeover switch 121IW030 are arranged in front of the main substrate 11 in the substrate case 121IW201. Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed when the game machine frame 121IW003 is not opened, the front when viewing the main board 11 is the back side of the game board 2 when the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened. This is the front when visually recognizing, and is different from the front of the pachinko game machine 1. - 特許庁However, the front when visually recognizing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko game machine 1 may be common.

As described above, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 in the characteristic portion 121IW cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. There is a possibility that the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 are operated from inside the game island where the pachinko game machine 1 is installed. Therefore, in this characterizing portion 121IW, as shown in FIGS. 20-2 and 20-3, the right end portion of the outer frame 121IW001a includes a setting key 121IW051 and a setting changeover switch 52 when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed. A security cover 121IW500A is attached to cover the right side of the board case 121IW201 from the rear side. The security cover 121IW500A is a substantially L-shaped member comprising a short piece 121IW500Aa facing in the front-rear direction and a long piece 121IW500Ab extending from the rear end of the short piece 121IW500Aa toward the left side of the pachinko game machine 1. , and is made of a plate-shaped synthetic resin material having transparency. The vertical dimension of the short piece 121IW500Aa is substantially the same as the vertical dimension of the back plate of the substrate case 121IW201. Security cover 121IW500A is fixed to the right end of outer frame 121IW001a via the front end of short piece 121IW500Aa.

As shown in FIG. 20-2, the long piece 121IW500Ab abuts (or approaches) the right portion of the board case 121IW201 from behind the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Thus, the right side of the substrate case 121IW201 including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is covered from the back side of the pachinko game machine 1.例文帳に追加Therefore, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 are inoperable by the long piece 121IW500Ab. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 20-3, in the state where the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open, the setting key 121IW051 and the setting switch 121IW052 move together with the gaming machine frame 121IW003 to move from the long piece 121IW500Ab. By moving away, the state of covering by the long piece 121IW500Ab is released, and an operable state is obtained.

In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 121IW, when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed, the security cover 121IW500A regulates the operation of the operation unit including the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052. On the other hand, when the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened, the restriction state by the security cover 121IW500A is canceled, and the operation of the setting key 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is permitted. state.

Since the substrate case 121IW201 is provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to access the setting keys 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052 when the game machine frame 121IW003 is closed. Unless the game machine frame 121IW003 is opened by a game arcade clerk or the like using the door key, the set values cannot be changed by operating the setting keys 121IW051 and the setting changeover switches 121IW052.

However, in a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed on a game island (not shown) of the game hall, even if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed, for example, other pachinko gaming machines adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 An unauthorized member such as a wire or a cell plate is inserted from between a game device such as a card unit or a spacer member installed between the pachinko game machine 1 and the setting key 121IW051 on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1. or the setting changeover switch 121IW052 to change the set value. By maintaining the restricted state in which the operation of the operation unit including the switch 121IW052 is restricted, the fraudulent act can be suitably suppressed.

Further, even in a regulated state in which the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed and the security cover 121IW500A covers the right side of the back surface of the board case 121IW201 including the setting keys 121IW051 and the setting changeover switch 121IW052, the board can be opened through the transparent security cover 121IW500A. Since the main board 11 and the like accommodated in the case 121IW201 can be seen through, the mounting surface of the main board 11 on which electronic components such as the CPU 103 are mounted and the state of sealing seals can be easily confirmed.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes programs read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of various random numbers used on the main substrate 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

In this characteristic part 121IW, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination, the random number MR2 for big hit type determination, the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination, and the normal figure display result determination Numerical data representing the random number MR4 of , and the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled so as to be countable. Random numbers other than these may be used in order to enhance the game effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by software update using different random counters in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. FIG. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100 or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100 . Random numbers used to control the progress of such games are also called game random numbers.

The ROM 101 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-4 and 20-5 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. In addition, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main substrate 11, and the variation mode of each symbol in the variable display such as special symbols and normal symbols. A variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns is stored.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result determination table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 20-4(A), a display result determination table (set value 2) shown in FIG. -4 (C) display result determination table (set value 3), in addition to the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), big hit variation pattern determination table (not shown), small hit variation pattern determination table ( Not shown), a losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this characteristic portion 121IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (ball output rate) changes according to the set value. Specifically, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using the display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the winning probability of the big hit (ball output rate) is changed. . The setting value consists of three levels from 1 to 3, where 1 is the lowest ball payout rate, and the higher the value is in the order of 1, 2, and 3, the higher the ball payout rate is. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage for the player is the lowest, and the advantage increases stepwise as the value increases in the order of 2 and 3. It should be noted that, in this characterizing section 121IW, the winning probability of the small hit is the same regardless of the setting value.

(Display Result Determination Table) FIGS. 20-4A to 20-4C are explanatory diagrams showing the display result determination table corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which hit determination values to be compared with MR1 are set. In each display result determination table, the variable special figure designation buffer is 1 (first), that is, the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the variable special figure designation buffer is 2 (second) That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbols are subject to variable display, a determination value for a big hit and a determination value for a small hit are set.

As shown in FIG. 20-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 1, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is subject to variable display In this case, a jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/320 at non-probability variation, 1/32 at probability variation) than when the set value is "2" or "3". On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and winning of small wins has the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are ``2'' and ``3''. It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/320 when non-variable, 1/32 when variable). do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability (1/2) is higher than when the first special symbol is subject to variable display. It is designed to be elected.

Also, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1" Winning a big hit with a higher probability than in some cases (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable). On the other hand, some of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small wins, and the small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "3". It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the same probability as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/300 when non-variable, 1/30 when variable) wins the jackpot do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value is "1" and "3", the same probability (1/2) as in the case of "1" and "3".

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the fluctuation special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is "1", Winning a jackpot with a higher probability (1/280 at non-probability variation, 1/28 at probability variation) than in the case of "2". On the other hand, some of these judgment values are set as judgment values corresponding to small wins, and the small wins are won with the same probability (1/99) as when the set values are "1" and "2". It is designed to Further, when the variable special figure designation buffer is the second, as the determination value corresponding to the big hit, the same determination value as in the case where the variation special figure designation buffer is the first is set, and the second special symbol. Even if is subject to variable display, the probability of winning a big hit is the same as when the first special symbol is subject to variable display (1/280 when non-variable, 1/28 when variable). do. On the other hand, half of these determination values are set as determination values corresponding to small hits, so that the probability is higher than the case where the first special symbol is subject to variable display, and the set value is "1" and "2", the same probability (1/2) of winning a small hit.

That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. If it matches with the hit determination value, it is determined to be a big hit (big hit type A to big hit type C) with respect to the special symbol. Also, when MR1 coincides with any of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. That is, the winning of the big win and the small win is determined with a probability corresponding to the set value. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 20-4(A) to (C) indicates the probability (percentage) of a big win and the probability (percentage) of a small win. Determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to control to the big win game state. It is also to decide whether or not to make it a big hit pattern. Determining whether or not to make a small win means determining whether or not to control to a small winning game state, but the stop at the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B It is also to determine whether or not the design is to be a small winning design.

In addition, in this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, the case is shown in which the odds of winning the small win are the same regardless of the set value, but the mode is not limited to this. For example, similar to the probability of winning a big win, the odds of winning a small win may be increased in the order of 1, 2, and 3 as the set value increases. Further, in this case, the setting difference of the winning probability of the small win may be set to the same ratio as the setting difference of the winning probability of the big win. Specifically, if the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "1" is 1/100, the winning probability of the small win at the setting value "2" is designed to be 1/93.75, It may be set so that the winning probability of the small hit at the set value "3" is 1/87.5.

Also, in a game machine that does not provide a small hit, the configuration shown in the characteristic portion 121IW may be applied.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the CPU 103 uses the display result determination table shown in FIGS. A big-hit determination table and a small-hit determination table are provided separately, and the big-hit determination is made according to whether the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner or the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner, regardless of the variable special symbol designating buffer. A common table may be used, and the determination of the small hit may be made using separate tables depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer is the first or the second buffer.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the case is shown in which the advantage increases in the order of setting value "1"<setting value "2"<setting value "3". may be configured to change. For example, it is applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to a high probability/high base state, is maintained in the high probability/high base state until the next big win occurs, and is configured so that a certain amount of prize balls can be obtained in a small win game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 20-4, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a small hit occurs with a high probability of 1/2, and a prize ball is likely to be obtained. Therefore, in a specific game state (high probability/high base state in this example), unlike other game states, a big hit is unlikely to occur (high probability/high base state is likely to continue). A value of "1" may be the setting with the highest degree of advantage.

Also, for example, when applied to a gaming machine in which the probability variation state ends based on the execution of the variable display of a predetermined number of times (the probability variation end number) after being controlled to the probability variation state (high probability state), the same probability variation If it is the number of ending times, it may be configured such that the variable probability continuation rate (continuous home rate) increases in the order of set value "1"<set value "2"<set value "3".

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game machine The number of setting values that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

(Big Hit Type Determination Table) FIG. 20-5(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, when the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first start winning hole (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed), A common jackpot type determination table is used in the case of determining the jackpot type using the reservation memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening (that is, when the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner). Although configured to be used, different tables may be provided to determine different percentages of which jackpot types are determined.

The jackpot type determination table selects a jackpot type among jackpot types A to jackpot types C based on a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the variation display result is a jackpot pattern. It is a table referred to in order to decide either.

In the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), a determination value corresponding to a random number (MR2) for jackpot type determination is assigned to each set value. Percentages of judgment values obtained are shown. In other words, the ratio of which one of the big hit types A to C is determined for each set value is shown. It should be noted that the determination value corresponding to the random number is actually assigned to the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 and the non-reach loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. For simplicity, the percentage of assigned decision values is shown.

As shown in FIG. 20-5 (A), in the jackpot type determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to the jackpot type C is high, and when the setting value is "2", When the percentage of the big hit type B is determined to be high and the setting value is "3", the determination value is assigned so that the percentage of the big hit type A to be determined is high.

20-5(B), in this feature section 121IW, the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in the jackpot game are defined for each jackpot type. It is

The fanfare period is, for example, a period during which the big win opening pre-processing of step S114 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the big win pattern is stopped and displayed on the effect control board 12 side, the big win game state is started. This is the period in which the fanfare effect as the effect action to be notified is executed.

The interval period is, for example, a period in which the process after opening the big win in step S116 is executed on the main board 11 side, and after the round in which the big winning hole is opened on the effect control board 12 side, the next It is a period during which an interval production is executed as a production operation for notifying the start of the round.

The ending period is, for example, a period during which the big win ending process of step S117 is executed on the main board 11 side, and an ending effect as a production operation for notifying the end of the big win game state is executed on the effect control board 12 side. It is the period during which

As shown in FIG. 20-5(B), the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are the longest in the case of the jackpot type A, the second in the case of the jackpot type B, and the longest in the case of the jackpot type C. set to be short.

As described above, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of determination of the jackpot type C is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the ratio of determination of jackpot type A is high, so the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period tend to be relatively long. Therefore, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period become longer in the order of the setting values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characterizing portion 121IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3', the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period increases in the order. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average period of the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, thereby increasing gambling. can be prevented from becoming too high.

This characteristic portion 121IW is configured to be able to execute a mid-jackpot suggesting performance (details will be described later) that suggests a set value during a big-hit game. It is feasible in the period. With such a configuration, the interest in the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period can be enhanced. Also, by directing the player's interest to the effect suggesting during the big win, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the length of each period.

In the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period, a common effect may be executed regardless of the length of the set period. In this case, it is desirable that an effect (for example, display of a still image, etc.) that is difficult for the player to notice the length of the period is executed in common.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, a fanfare period, an interval period and an ending period are set for each jackpot type, and the ratio of which jackpot type is determined for each setting value is different, thereby increasing the number of jackpots. When the probability of winning (percentage of winning balls) is set to be high, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period are lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. A fanfare period, an interval period, and an ending period may be fixedly set for each value. Further, for example, one of a plurality of types of fanfare periods, interval periods, and ending periods having different predetermined periods may be determined by lottery. In this case, a table is used in which the judgment values are set so that the ratio of selecting the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period in which relatively long periods are set is high in the order of jackpot types A<B<C. By doing so, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the average period of the ending period can be lengthened in the order of the set values "1"<"2"<"3".

In this feature portion 121IW, in any of the jackpot types A to C, the time saving control and probability variation control executed after the end of the jackpot game state are specified a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature portion 121IW). It ends when the figure game is executed or the jackpot game state is entered before the special game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Alternatively, in the case of a specific jackpot type, high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the jackpot game state ends are continuously executed until a jackpot occurs again after the jackpot game state ends. may be made. In the case of such a specific jackpot type, a jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state, which is a so-called continuous game state. This characteristic portion 121IW is configured so that the ratio of the big hits differs for each set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, but in addition to or instead of such a configuration, the probability variable continuation is performed for each set value. The rate (consecutive rate) may be different.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, there is no difference in the degree of advantage between the jackpot types A to jackpot types C (for example, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, the number of times of control, etc.), fanfare period, interval The period and the average period of the ending period are configured to be different, but for each jackpot type, the number of rounds during the jackpot game, the presence or absence of time reduction control and variable probability control, and the number of times of control are different, and the advantage is different. You may do so. In this case, the performance during the round may be different for each big win type, or may be the same regardless of the big win type.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, according to the set value, the jackpot type when the variation display result is a jackpot is determined at different ratios from jackpot type A, jackpot type B, and jackpot type C. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and depending on the set value, one or more of the jackpot types A, jackpot types B, and jackpot types C cannot be determined. There may be more than one. In other words, if the determination ratio of the jackpot type differs according to the set value, it is possible to not determine one of the jackpot types (the determination ratio is 0%), or to set a specific jackpot type to 100%. Determining percentages is included.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the case where the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period differ according to the jackpot type is shown, but this is not limited to such an aspect, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending are not limited to the jackpot type. It may be configured to have different periods. For example, the fanfare period, the interval period, and the ending period may be uniformly determined according to which of the set values "1" to "3". Further, for example, according to which of the set values "1" to "3", a lottery process is performed according to the selection probability according to the set value, and the fanfare period, the interval period and the ending period are determined. You may

As described above, in this characteristic part 121IW, since the determination ratio of the jackpot type when the variable display result is a jackpot is different according to the set value, the game interest can be improved. .

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for judging the jackpot type. It may be determined using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the larger the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit, and the easier the determination of the jackpot type C as the jackpot type). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Further, in this characteristic portion 121IW, while the jackpot probability changes according to the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the game property itself does not change, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the game characteristics may be changed according to the setting values set in the pachinko game machine 1 .

For example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability variable state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and game balls are provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a specific round during the jackpot game. Based on passing through a predetermined count switch, the game state after the end of the big win game is controlled to a probability variable state, while the rate of the game ball passing through the count switch during the big win game differs according to the big win type. When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 3, the probability of a big hit is 1/320 and the probability of a small hit is 1/50. It may be a game property (so-called 1 type 2 type mixed type) that controls to a big hit game state based on the game ball passing through a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the middle). Furthermore, although the set values set in the pachinko game machine 1 are 1 to 3 and the game performance is the same, the probability of a big hit or the probability of a small hit is higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. , a setting may be provided in which the number of winning balls that can be obtained during the big hit game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 4).

Furthermore, in such a case where the game characteristics are changed according to the setting values, common switches may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above example, when the set value is 1 or 4, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is operated as a production switch (a game ball passes through the count switch). When the set value is 2 or 3, a predetermined count switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a game switch (a switch for executing a predetermined effect each time a game ball is played). It may be used as a switch for controlling the game state to a variable probability state or a big hit game state based on passing through the count switch.

(Small hit type determination table) FIG. 20-5 (C) is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit type determination table stored in the ROM101. As shown in FIG. 20-5(C), in this characterizing portion 121IW, small hit types A to C are provided as small hit types. As shown in FIG. 20-5 (C), in this characteristic portion 121IW, the determination ratio of the small hit types A to C is the same regardless of which of the set values "1" to "3".

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the opening period and number of openings of the big winning opening during the small winning game are the same regardless of any of the small winning types A to C, and the degree of advantage in the game is the same. .

(Variation pattern determination table) In addition, the ROM 101 also stores a variation pattern determination table for determining a variation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. One of the plurality of types of variation patterns described above is determined.

Specifically, as a variation pattern determination table, a big hit variation pattern determination table used when it is decided in advance that the variation display result is a "big hit", and a variation display result is set to a "small hit". A small hit variation pattern determination table used when is determined in advance and a loss variation pattern determination table used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is "loss" are prepared in advance. .

(Loss Variation Pattern Determination Table) FIG. 20-6 is an explanatory diagram showing a loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 121IW, a period (hereinafter also referred to as a special period) from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example), and the other period ( Hereinafter, it is also referred to as a non-special period), and is configured to use a different loss variation pattern determination table.

Specifically, in the special period, the variation pattern is determined using the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), and in the non-special period, shown in FIG. 20-6 (B) A variation pattern is determined using the second loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 121IW, the period from when the setting is changed when the power is turned on to when the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) is defined as the special period, but the present invention is limited to this. For example, the special period may be a period until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example) regardless of whether or not the setting is changed when the power is turned on. Also, a real-time clock or the like may be used as a special period within a predetermined time period (for example, from 9:00 am to 11:00 am). Also, the period until the first big hit occurs may be set as the special period.

20-6 (A) and (B) show the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables, both of which become normal reach loss and super reach loss in the order of set values "1" < "2" < "3" Judgment values are assigned so that the percentage is high and the percentage of non-reach failures is low. With such a configuration, the execution ratio of normal reach and super reach differs depending on the set value, so the set value is suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are executed.

In addition, the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A) has a higher percentage of normal reach losing than the second losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Judgment values are assigned so that the difference in the ratio of normal reach loss between them increases. With such a configuration, in the special period, it becomes easier to recognize the difference in the frequency of normal reach execution than in the non-special period (that is, it becomes easier to recognize the suggestion of the setting value), so the motivation to play the game during the special period can be given, and the game interest can be enhanced.

In addition, for example, the variation pattern with super reach (or a specific variation pattern thereof) is determined at the same rate regardless of the difference in the set value (or regardless of the difference between the special period and the non-special period) You may do so. By doing so, depending on the setting value, the execution ratio of only a specific variation pattern (normal reach loss in this example) will differ, and the setting value is suggested by the frequency of execution of the specific variation pattern become. In addition, conversely, the selection ratio of the variation pattern that results in super reach loss may also be varied according to the set value.

In addition, the first and second losing variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6 (A) and (B) are either normal reach losing or super reach losing depending on the set value when other than non-reach losing. Judgment values are assigned so that the ratio (that is, the balance between normal reach loss and super reach loss) is different. Specifically, in the first losing variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 20-6 (A), the ratio of normal reach losing becomes significantly higher in the order of setting values “1” < “2” < “3” (this example Then, it increases by 5%), specifically, the second loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. is slightly increased (in this example, increased by 0.2%). With such a configuration, the set value is suggested by the selection tendency between the normal reach loss and the super reach loss. In addition, it is possible to increase the difference in selection tendency between the special period and the non-special period.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, it is possible to execute setting suggestion effects at different ratios depending on the set value. It is a concept including that the execution ratio of normal reach loss and super reach loss is different depending on the set value, and that the execution ratio of only normal reach loss is different according to the set value.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, a common background image is displayed on the image display device 5 when any of the first and second loss variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 20-6(A) and (B) is used. Then, the variable display of the decoration pattern is performed. Also, when the set value is set to any one of 1 to 3, the common background image is displayed on the image display device 5, and the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner. Note that a dedicated background image may be displayed only during a special period or during a period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the special period or the period from when the power is turned on until the variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (30 times in this example).

In addition, not limited to the example of this characteristic portion 121IW, for example, a special variation pattern that suggests a set value (for example, a variation pattern in which the aspect of the variation display of the decorative pattern is different from the usual, and the set value is 1 or 2 ) may be provided so that a special variation pattern can be selected only in a special period. With such a configuration as well, it is possible to give motivation to play a game during the special period, and to increase the interest in the game.

(Non-reach-loss variation pattern determination table) FIG. 20-7 is an explanatory diagram showing a non-reach-loss variation pattern determination table. In this characteristic portion 121IW, a plurality of types of non-reach loss variation patterns with different variation times are provided, and when the variation pattern is determined to be non-reach loss, it is further determined to be any of non-reach loss A to C. is configured to In addition, not limited to such a configuration, for example, the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine whether

As shown in FIG. 20-7, in the non-reach loss fluctuation pattern determination table, when the setting value is "1", the ratio of being determined to be non-reach loss C (variation time 7 seconds) is high, and the setting value is "2 ”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss B (variation time 8 seconds) is high, and if the setting value is “3”, the percentage determined to be non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds) is higher is assigned a judgment value.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, when the set value is "1", the rate of determination as non-reach loss C is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively short. On the other hand, when the set value is "3", the rate of determination as non-reach loss A is high, so the fluctuation time during non-reach loss tends to be relatively long. Therefore, the average fluctuation time becomes longer in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3".

This characterizing portion 121IW is configured such that the probability of winning a big hit (percentage of winning balls) increases in the order of setting values "1"<"2"<"3". '<'2'<'3'. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average fluctuation time can be lengthened, that is, the progress of the game can be delayed, and the gambling nature can be prevented from becoming too high. can be prevented.

In this characteristic portion 121IW, the average variation time is configured to be different by varying the ratio of which one of the non-reach loss A to C with different variation times according to the setting value. Variation patterns other than reach loss (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) may also be provided with a plurality of types so that the variation time is different, and the selected ratio may be different according to the set value. In addition, if multiple types of fluctuation patterns (for example, normal reach loss, super reach loss, etc.) are provided with different fluctuation times, the time of the swaying display of the decorative pattern and the time of high-speed fluctuation display etc. It is desirable that there is no difference in appearance.

In addition, this characteristic portion 121IW is configured so that the average fluctuation time varies depending on the set value, but instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the final decorative pattern (final The period during which the stop symbol) is stopped and displayed may be different. With such a configuration, when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is set to be high, it is possible to lengthen the period in which the fixed decorative pattern (final stop pattern) is stop-displayed, that is, delay the progress of the game. , it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

In addition, in this characteristic part 121IW, the variation time is set for each of non-reach loss A to C, and the ratio of determining which of non-reach loss A to C is different for each set value, thereby winning a big hit. When the probability (ball output rate) is set to be high, the average variation time is lengthened, that is, the progress of the game is delayed. may be fixedly set, and the variation time may be longer when the probability of winning the jackpot (ball output rate) is higher.

Note that this characteristic portion 121IW is provided with a shortening variation pattern having a shorter variation time than other variation patterns. For example, there is provided a variation pattern of shortened non-reach loss (variation time 1.5 seconds) whose variation time is shorter than non-reach loss A (variation time 9 seconds). This shortening variation pattern is configured to be used, for example, when the reserved storage number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (eg, 3). With such a configuration, when the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit or is close to the upper limit, this state is eliminated and the variable display is performed efficiently (that is, the game can be progressed efficiently). ). Therefore, it can be said that it is inappropriate to delay the progress of the game when the reserved memory number is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Therefore, in this characteristic portion 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of pending memories is equal to or greater than the predetermined number has a common variation time regardless of the set value. It should be noted that regardless of the configuration of the characteristic portion 121IW, the shortening variation pattern used when the number of reserved memories is equal to or greater than a predetermined number may also vary in variation time according to the set value.

(Setting change processing) Next, change of the setting value of the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 121IW will be described. Figures 20-8 and 20-9 are flowcharts showing game control main processing in the characterizing section 121IW. Note that the processing of steps IWS001 to S002 in this characteristic portion 121IW is the same as the processing of steps S1 to S2 shown in FIG.

When the initial setting is performed, the CPU 103 waits for the activation of the effect control means for measuring the time until the effect control means (specifically, the effect control CPU 120) is activated when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. A timer is set (step 121IWS003). In this case, sufficient time is set to the effect control means startup waiting timer from when the power supply to the gaming machine is started until the effect control CPU 120 is activated. Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the effect control means activation wait timer (step 121IWS004), and confirms whether or not the value of the effect control means activation wait timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 121IWS005). If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is not 0, the process returns to step 121IWS004, and the processing of steps 121IWS004 to S005 is repeatedly executed. If the value of the effect control means activation waiting timer is 0, the process proceeds to step 121IWS006.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS003 to S005, after waiting until the effect control CPU 120 is started, the processing after step 121IWS006 is executed, and the change and confirmation of the set value, the initialization of the RAM, the recovery processing, etc. are executed. be done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which various commands such as a set value command, an initialization command, a command for recovery, and the like, which will be described later, are transmitted before the effect control CPU 120 is activated, and a command can be omitted. can be prevented from occurring.

Next, the CPU 103 stores, for example, a factory-shipped setting flag indicating that the factory-shipped settings remain in the RAM 102 (for example, this flag is cleared even if RAM clear processing 1 and 2 and recovery processing described later are executed). (cleared when setting change processing described later is executed) is set, and in step 121IWS006, it is checked whether or not this factory shipment setting flag is set. do it. In addition, not limited to such an aspect, for example, a value (for example, "0" or "-") indicating that the setting value is set at the time of shipment from the factory is set. It may be confirmed whether or not is the value at the time of shipment from the factory. If the factory settings remain unchanged (step 121IWS006; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is not the factory default setting (step 121IWS006; Yes), that is, if the setting value has already been changed at least once, the CPU 103 backs up the RAM 102 (backup RAM) by the same process as in step S4. It is determined whether or not data is saved (step 121IWS007). Specifically, at step 121IWS007, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS007; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check of the backed up data (using an error detection code) in the same manner as in step S5 to determine whether the data is normal. (Step 121IWS008). In step 121IWS008, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply was stopped, using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal. If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step 121IWS008; No), the process proceeds to step IWS010.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step 121IWS008; Yes), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not a setting change flag indicating that the setting value is currently being changed is set (step 121IWS009). ). If the setting changing flag is set (step 121IWS009; No), that is, if the power supply to the game machine is restarted due to a power failure or the like during the setting value change, the process proceeds to step IWS010.

At step 121IWS010, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a RAM abnormality error notification command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 121IWS010). The CPU 103 may control the display monitor 121IW029 to display a display indicating a RAM abnormality error (for example, display of "E").

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON (step 121IWS011). If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWS012). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS013). If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 1 processing (step 121IWS014). In RAM clear 1 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 1 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared, and performance display such as continuous ratio, role ratio, and base is cleared. information is retained without being cleared. In addition, in the RAM clear 1 process, the set values stored in the RAM 102 are also cleared. Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS027.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is off (N at step 121IWS011), if the setting key 121IW051 is off (N at step 121IWS012), or if the output signal from the clear switch is off ( At step 121IWS013 N), the process does not proceed to step 121IWS014, but proceeds to loop processing.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS006 to S014, in this characteristic part 121IW, if the backup RAM is not normal (steps 121IWS007, N of S008), or if the settings for factory shipment remain unchanged (step 121IWS006 Y), if power failure or the like occurs during the setting change (step 121IWS009 Y), the setting key 121IW051 is turned on and the clear switch is turned on with the game machine frame 121IW003 opened. On this condition, the RAM is cleared, and the setting values after step 121IWS027 can be changed. On the other hand, unless the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is opened and the setting key 121IW051 and the clear switch are turned on, loop processing is executed, setting values cannot be changed, and game control does not proceed.

If the setting changing flag is not set (step 121IWS009; No), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step 121IWS015).

If the output signal from the clear switch is not ON, the CPU 103 determines whether the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is ON (step 121IWS016). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWS017). If the setting key 121IW051 is ON, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process start command indicating to start the setting confirmation process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS018).

On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting confirmation process start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner). In this case, when an operation button for effect such as the push button 31B is pressed on the effect control board 12 side, "maintenance mode" or the like may be displayed to shift to the maintenance mode. "Maintenance mode" includes, for example, time and date settings for the real-time clock, error history (a record of when and what errors occurred), and setting change history (when the set value was changed and after the change). This mode allows you to check the recording of set values. When the setting key 121IW051 is turned off and the setting confirmation process and the setting change process are completed, the maintenance mode is also terminated.

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting confirmation processing (step 121IWS019).

After completing the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step 121IWS020) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped, by the same process as in step S6. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents stored in the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation process end command indicating that the setting confirmation process has ended to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS021). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (N at step 121IWS016) or if the setting key 121IW051 is not ON (N at step 121IWS017), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S6. Then, a recovery process (step 121IWS022) is performed to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time when the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets the work area based on the contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed-up data). Moreover, CPU103 transmits the production|presentation control command which instruct|indicates restoration from a power failure to the production|presentation control board 12 by the process similar to step S7 (step 121IWS023). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

If the output signal from the clear switch is on, the CPU 103 executes RAM clear 2 processing (step 121IWS024). In RAM clear 2 processing, the CPU 103 performs RAM clear processing for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area. However, in the RAM clear 2 process, the memory area of the RAM 102 other than the area for storing performance display information such as continuous ratio, role ratio, base, etc., and the area for storing setting values is cleared. Performance display information such as role ratios and bases, and set value information are retained without being cleared.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON (step 121IWS025). If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, CPU 103 determines whether setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWS026). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 sets a setting changing flag (step 121IWS027).

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change process start command indicating to start the setting change process to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS028). On the effect control board 12 side, when the setting change processing start command is received, control is performed to notify that the setting is being changed (for example, a predetermined image is displayed on the image display device 5, or a predetermined image is displayed from the speakers 8L and 8R). or emit a decorative luminous body such as a decorative LED in a predetermined manner).

Next, the CPU 103 executes setting change processing (step 121IWS029).

After completing the setting change process, the CPU 103 resets the setting changing flag (step 121IWS030). Also, the CPU 103 transmits a set value command indicating the set set value to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS031). Also, a setting change process end command indicating that the setting change process has ended is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS032). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

On the other hand, if the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (N at step 121IWS025) or if the setting key 121IW051 is not ON (N at step 121IWS026), the CPU 103 performs the same processing as in step S9. , the effect control command for instructing initialization is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S9). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS034.

In this characterizing portion 121IW, the processing of steps IWS034 to S036 is the same as the processing of steps S10 to S12 shown in FIG.

Next, the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019) will be described. FIG. 20-10(A) is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process (step 121IWS019).

In the setting confirmation process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor 121IW029.
(step 121IWSA01).

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWSA02). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA03). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSA02 and repeats the processing of steps 121IWSA02 to SA03. That is, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open and the setting key 121IW051 is on.

If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON, CPU 103 executes setting confirmation error processing (step 121IWSA04). After that, it shifts to loop processing. In addition, in step 121IWSA04, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating a setting confirmation error, and execute the setting confirmation error notification based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a circuit board mounted on the gaming machine. Further, in this example, when the setting confirmation error process is executed, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding by shifting to the loop process.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSA05). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process of step 121IWSA05 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is closed), the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, the setting change process (step 121IWS029) will be described. FIG. 20-10B is a flow chart showing the setting change process (step 121IWS029).

In the setting change process, the CPU 103 first identifies the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, and displays the identified setting values on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB01).

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the setting switch 121IW052 is ON (step 121IWSB02). If the output signal from the setting switch 121IW052 is not ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB05. If the output signal from the setting changeover switch 121IW052 is ON (Y in step 121IWSB02), the CPU 103 updates and displays the set values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 (step 121IWSB03). For example, when "1" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display of the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "2", and when "2" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029 , the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "3", and if "3" is displayed as the set value on the display monitor 121IW029, the display on the display monitor 121IW029 is updated to "1". In addition, the CPU 103 stores the setting value (the setting value after updating) displayed on the display monitor 121IW0029 in the backup area of the RAM 102 (updating the already stored setting value) (step 121IWSB04).

Next, CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from setting key 121IW051 is ON (step 121IWSB05). If the setting key 121IW051 is on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB06). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process proceeds to step 121IWSB02 and repeats the processing of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06. That is, while the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is open and the setting key 121IW051 is on, the processes of steps 121IWSB02 to SB06 are repeatedly executed.

If the output signal from door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON, CPU 103 executes setting change error processing (step 121IWSB07). After that, it shifts to loop processing. In step 121IWSB07, for example, the CPU 103 may transmit a command indicating that there is a setting change error, and execute the setting change error notification based on the fact that the effect control CPU 120 receives the command. good. Further, for example, the CPU 103 may notify the error by turning on an error LED on a circuit board mounted on the gaming machine. Also, in this example, when the setting change error process is executed, the error state is continued until the power is turned on again, and the process is prevented from proceeding by shifting to the loop process. In this case, since the setting change flag remains set at step 121IWS027, the RAM clear 1 process is executed after the power is turned on again (Y at step 121IWS009, see 121IWS014). The error state will be cleared.

If the setting key 121IW051 is not on, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the output signal from the door opening sensor 121IW090 is on (step 121IWSB08). If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is ON, the process of step 121IWSB08 is repeatedly executed. If the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is not ON (that is, if the gaming machine frame 121IW003 is in the closed state), the setting change process is terminated.

FIG. 20-11 is an explanatory diagram showing the processing executed when the power is turned on. In this characteristic portion 121IW, as shown in FIG. 20-11, when the setting key 121IW051 is on when the power is turned on (and when the output signal from the door open sensor 121IW090 is on), the clear switch is turned on. If so, setting change processing (step 121IWS029) is executed, and if the clear switch is off, setting confirmation processing (steps 121IWS015 to S017) is executed. If the setting key 121IW051 is turned off when the power is turned on, initialization processing (step S8) is executed if the clear switch is turned on, and recovery processing (step S6) is executed if the clear switch is turned off. executed.

Next, the display mode of the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 20-12(A) and 20-12(B), when the power is turned off (powered off) by the operation of a game hall clerk or the like, the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. The display on the display monitor 121IW029 ends when the supply stops. In addition, when the big winning opening is open during the big winning game or the small winning game at the timing of turning off the power, the big winning opening is closed by stopping the power supply to the solenoid 82 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12(C), when the game arcade clerk or the like turns on the power while operating the clear switch (if Yes in step S3 of the game control main processing), the setting key 121IW051 is turned ON. The setting change process is executed by the CPU 103 on the condition that it is, and the setting value stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 121IW029.

In the state where the setting values are displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, as shown in FIG. Numerical values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are sequentially updated (for example, updated in the order of 1→2→3→1→ . . . each time the setting switch 121IW052 is operated). Also, the set values displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 are stored (updated) in the backup area of the RAM 102 .

Next, as shown in FIG. 20-12(E), the CPU 103 blinks the display monitor 121IW029 based on the fact that the setting key 121IW051 has been turned off by the operation of the game hall clerk or the like, so that the game hall clerk or the like that the new set values have been stored in the backup area of the RAM 102. Although the illustrated example shows an example in which the display monitor 121IW029 blinks, it may be turned off.

Also, if the reserve memory is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserve memory is cleared. Also, when the big winning opening is closed at the timing of FIG. 20-12(A) (the timing when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off), RAM clear processing is executed when the setting is changed. Since the memory related to the big win is erased, the big prize opening remains closed. After that, the CPU 103 ends the setting change processing, and enters a state where a game can be played, that is, a state where a variation display result, a jackpot type, a lottery for determination of a variation pattern, payout of prize balls, and the like can be executed.

In addition, in the setting change processing in this characterizing portion 121IW, as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029, a mode of displaying the setting values stored in the backup area of the RAM 102 is exemplified, but the present invention is limited to this. As an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 121IW029 in the setting change process, the most disadvantageous setting value for the player ("1" in the case of this characteristic portion 121IW) or the most advantageous setting value for the player. A set value (“3” for the characteristic portion 121IW) may be displayed.

In the example shown in FIG. 20-12, the setting value is displayed using the first display of the four-digit display of the display monitor 121IW029 when confirming or changing the setting value. For example, the setting values may be displayed using the second and subsequent displays of the display monitor 121IW029. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed by performing a dedicated 4-digit display on the display monitor 121IW029. In this case, for example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays "-S-1" in four digits, and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays "-S-2". , or if the set value is "3", the display monitor 121IW029 may display "-S-3" in four digits. Further, for example, the setting value may be displayed on all four digits of the display monitor 121IW029. For example, if the set value is "1", the display monitor 121IW029 displays 4 digits "1111", and if the set value is "2", the display monitor 121IW029 displays 4 digits "2222". may

(Special symbol normal processing) Next, the processing of the special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the present characterizing portion 121IW will be described. FIGS. 20-13 and 20-14 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total reserved memory number (the total number of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number) (step 121IWS101). For example, it checks the count value of a total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not the second reserved storage number is 0 (step 121IWS 102). For example, it is checked whether the count value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the second reserved storage number is 0 or not. If the second reserved memory number is not 0, the CPU 103 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). is set with data indicating "second" (step 121 IWS 103). If the second reserved memory number is 0, the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step 121IWS104).

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS102 to S104, in this characterizing section 121IW, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In addition, not limited to such a mode, for example, according to the starting winning order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol and may be configured to execute

Next, the CPU 103 reads each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved memory number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 121IWS105). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the first reserved memory count=1 in the first reserved memory buffer is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads out each random value stored in the saving area corresponding to the second reserved memory number=1 in the second reserved memory buffer. Stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 .

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 121IWS106). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the number of storage areas in the first reserved storage buffer Shift content. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103, in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 102, saves the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) Each stored random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number=n−1. Also, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reservation storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reservation storage buffer of the RAM 102 Store the random value in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved memory number (or each second reserved memory number) is extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or 2nd reserved storage number)=1, 2, 3, 4.

Then, the CPU 103 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by one. That is, 1 is subtracted from the count value of the total pending storage number counter (step 121IWS107). Note that the CPU 103 saves the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is decremented by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 .

Next, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value command indicating the setting value set in the RAM 102 to the effect control board 12 (step 121IWS108). In this characteristic portion, as already described, the processing of step 121IWS031 is executed to transmit the set value command when the setting change processing is executed when the power is turned on. A set value command is transmitted each time the variable display is started by executing the process of .

Even if the same variation pattern is used, if the configuration is such that a different variation pattern command is sent for each set value, variation pattern commands for the total number of variation patterns x the number of set values (3 in this example) are required. As a result, the data capacity may increase. Therefore, for example, a set value command is transmitted only when a specific variation pattern is used, and only the variation pattern command corresponding to the specific variation pattern is provided with the variation pattern command for the number of set values. good. In this case, for example, the set value command is transmitted only when the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation with the highest output frequency is used, and only the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern of the normal fluctuation is the fluctuation pattern command for the number of set values may be provided.

In this example, the same set value command is sent as the set value command (see step 121IWS031) when the power is turned on and the set value command when fluctuation starts (see step 121IWS108). It is not limited to any form. For example, a set value command for when power is turned on and a set value command for when fluctuation starts may be configured as separate commands so that different set value commands are sent when power is turned on and when fluctuation starts. good.

Also, in this example, a case is shown in which a set value command is transmitted separately from the variation pattern command at the start of variation. good too. In this case, for example, even if the variation pattern command specifies the same variation pattern A, if the set value is "1", the variation pattern command A-1 is transmitted, and if the set value is "2" A variation pattern command A-2 may be transmitted, and if the set value is "3", a variation pattern command A-3 may be transmitted.

In addition, regardless of the setting value on the game control microcomputer 100 side, the same variation pattern command (for example, variation pattern command A) can be configured to be output, and depending on which setting value is on the effect control CPU 120 side It may be configured such that which variation pattern is selected or the selection ratio is varied. For example, if the setting value is 1, the variation pattern A-1 is selected or the variation pattern A-1 is selected at a high rate, or if the setting value is 2, the variation pattern A-2 is selected or the variation pattern A-2 is high Alternatively, if the set value is 3, the variation pattern A-3 may be selected or the variation pattern A-3 may be selected at a high percentage. In this case, for example, the variation patterns A-1 to A-3 have the same variation time, but may differ in the presence/absence of pseudo-runs, the number of pseudo-runs, and the presence/absence and type of reach. Further, in this case, for example, when the setting value command cannot be received normally, the variation pattern A-1 is uniformly selected, or when the setting value command is not normally received, the selection ratio dedicated to may be configured to select a variation pattern with .

Also, in this example, the case where the set value command is transmitted at the start of fluctuation has been shown, but the configuration is not limited to such a mode, and for example, the set value command may be transmitted at the end of fluctuation.

Further, the CPU 103 performs control for transmitting a background designation command to the effect control board 12 according to the current game state (step 121IWS109). In this case, the CPU 103, for example, performs control to transmit the probability variable state background designation command in the case of the probability variable state, and performs control to transmit the time reduction state background designation command in the case of the time saving state, and is in the normal state In this case, control is performed to send a normal state background designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination from the random number buffer area, and executes the big hit determination module. The big hit determination module compares a predetermined big hit determination value or small hit determination value (see FIG. 20-4) with the random number MR1, and if they match, determines a big hit or a small hit. is the program to run. That is, it is a program for executing the processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match any of the big hit determination values (N of step 121IWS110), the CPU 103 performs a small hit determination process (step 121IWS111). Then, when it is determined to be a small win (Y in step 121IWS111), the CPU 103 sets a small win flag indicating a small win (step 121IWS112), and proceeds to step 121IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 does not match either the big-hit judgment value or the small-hit judgment value (N in step 121IWS111), that is, if it is a loss, the process proceeds directly to step 121IWS116.

If the value of the random number MR1 matches any of the jackpot determination values (Y in step 121 IWS110), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating a jackpot (step IWS113). Next, the CPU 103 uses the jackpot type determination table (see FIG. 20-5) to determine the type ("jackpot type A , "jackpot type B" or "jackpot type C") is determined as the jackpot type (step 121IWS 114).

Further, the CPU 103 sets data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 102 (step 121IWS 115). For example, when the jackpot type is "jackpot type A", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "jackpot type B", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "jackpot type C", "03" is set as data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step 121IWS116). For example, when neither the big-hit flag nor the small-hit flag is set, the winning symbol "-" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, for example, when the big hit flag is set, the big hit symbol "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. It should be noted that a different special symbol may be determined as a stop symbol according to the type of the big hit. Further, for example, when the small hit flag is set, the small hit symbol "5" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 121IWS117).

(Production Mode Change Processing) Next, the operation of the production control means in this characterizing section 121IW will be described. FIG. 20-15 is a flow chart showing part of the effect control main processing in the characterizing section 121IW. In this characteristic part 121IW, in the production control main process, the production control CPU 120 executes the production control random number update process of step S77, and executes the production mode change process for changing the production mode (step 121IWS201). It returns to the process of step S73.

In this characteristic part 121IW, it is possible to control three types of production modes, production mode A to production mode C, and depending on which production mode is controlled, for example, the background screen of the image display device 5 is different, The types of characters appearing in the advance notice effect and reach effect are different. In the effect mode change process of step 121 IWS 201, the effect control CPU 120 performs control to change from the current effect mode to a different effect mode when a predetermined effect mode change condition is established. For example, when a real-time clock is mounted on the performance control board 12, the performance mode may be changed based on the date and time information from the real-time clock when a predetermined day or time comes. Further, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be executed, and the effect mode may be changed based on the decision to change the effect mode.

In step 121IW201, when the effect mode is changed, the effect control CPU 120 may, for example, set a flag corresponding to the effect mode after the change and reset a flag corresponding to the effect mode before the change. For example, when the effect mode is changed to A, the effect mode A flag is set, and the effect mode B flag or effect mode C flag before the change is reset. Further, for example, when the effect mode is changed to B, the effect mode B flag may be set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode C flag before the change may be reset. Also, for example, when the effect mode is changed to C, the effect mode C flag is set, and the effect mode A flag or effect mode B flag before the change is reset.

The method of changing the production mode may be changed in a predetermined order such as production mode A → production mode B → production mode C → production mode A → . Modes A to C may be changed at random.

(Command Analysis Processing) FIGS. 20-16 to 20-18 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis processing (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the reception command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 confirms the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 121IWS301). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. The case where the two match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the command reception buffer stores the reception command, the effect control CPU 120 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step 121IWS302). After reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 121IWS303). The reason for incrementing by 2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a set value command (step 121IWS304), the effect control CPU 120 stores the set value indicated by the received set value command in the set value storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 121IWS305). Also, the effect control CPU 120 sets a setting value command reception flag indicating that the setting value command has been normally received at least once after the game machine is powered on (step 121IWS306).

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, since the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 is not backed up by power, the set value and the set value command reception flag stored in the set value storage area are stored in the power supply to the gaming machine. cleared when the is stopped. Therefore, when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, no setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122, and the processing is started with the setting value command reception flag cleared. be. Since the performance control board 12 side is started in a state in which the set value is not stored, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the set value command even when the setting confirmation process or the recovery process is executed. so that the set value command is always transmitted when the power is turned on.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, a setting value command is transmitted when the game machine is powered on and setting change processing is performed. If it cannot be received at this point, the process of step 121 IWS 305 is not executed, and the set value is not stored in the set value storage area. However, in this characteristic part 121IW, even if the set value command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on, the set value command is transmitted for each variable display, so the processing of step 121IWS 305 is executed based on the set value command received thereafter. It can be executed and the setting value can be stored in the setting value storage area.

Also, even if the setting value command is received, the setting value included in the setting value command may be an abnormal value. It may be configured to determine whether or not the included set value is a normal value. For example, in this example, the setting value is configured to be set to any value from "1" to "3", but includes values such as "5" and "10" that should not be set. It may be configured to determine that the setting value included in the setting value command is abnormal when the setting value command contains the setting value. Also, for example, on the effect control CPU 120 side, the setting value indicated by the received setting value command is stored, and after that, when a new setting value command is received, the newly received setting value command It may be configured such that when the indicated set value and the previously stored set value do not match, it is determined that an inconsistency has occurred and that there is an abnormality. Even when it is determined that the setting value included in the setting value command is an abnormal value, the effect is restricted according to the processing method shown in the characteristic part 121IW assuming that the setting value command has not been received normally. It may be configured to

(Initial result setting) In this characteristic part 121IW, on the effect control board 12 side, in the command analysis process, from the main board 11, an initialization designation command, a command at the time of restoration, a setting change process end command, and a setting confirmation process end command , the image display device 5 receives a predetermined initial number (specifically, a combination of decorative symbols, which is displayed on the image display device 5 until the first variable display is started. ) is displayed (hereinafter also referred to as an initial appearance effect).

If the received effect control command is the setting change process end command (step 121IWS307), the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the set value command reception flag is set (step 121IWS308). If the setting value command reception flag is set (that is, when the setting change process is executed and the setting value command is normally received), the effect control CPU 120 is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 122. Based on the set values, using the initial figure determination table, even number initial figures (for example, "246", "224", etc.), which are combinations of even number ornament symbols, and odd number ornament symbols are combined. Either a certain odd initial outcome (for example, "135" or "113") or a special initial outcome, which is a combination of decorative symbols including a special symbol (eg, a star symbol), is determined (step 121IWS309). . Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

FIG. 20-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the initial payout decision table. In step 121, the IWS 309 performs lottery processing based on random numbers according to the allocation of determination values according to the set values stored in the set value storage area, using the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. determine the outcome. In the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. 20-19(A), the percentage of odd initial outcomes determined increases in the order of set values "1"<"2"<"3". Therefore, if the odd initial outcome is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it means that the setting has been changed and the set value is more advantageous than the case where the even initial outcome is displayed. It will be suggested that it is set to Also, as shown in FIG. 20-19(A), there are cases where a special initial roll is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, if the special initial result is displayed on the image display device 5 before the start of the game, it is determined that the setting has been changed and the set value is "3". With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player interested in the state of the pachinko game machine 1 before the start of the game, to give the player a motivation to start the game from an early time zone of the business hours of the game parlor, and to enhance the interest.

If the setting value command reception flag is not set (that is, if the setting change process is executed, but the setting value command cannot be received normally due to reasons such as missing commands or garbled data), effect control The CPU 120 checks whether the current effect mode is the effect mode A (step 121IWS310). Incidentally, whether or not it is the production mode A can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode A flag is set. If the effect mode is A, the effect control CPU 120 assumes that the set value is "1" and determines the initial outcome using the initial outcome determination table shown in FIG. ). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS310 to S311, in this characterizing section 121IW, when the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is A, the setting value which is the most disadvantageous setting The initial roll is determined to be "1". As shown in FIG. 20-19(A), with respect to the set value "1", the ratio of odd initial rolls is the lowest, and there are no special initial rolls. Such a configuration reduces the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying odd-numbered initial numbers or special initial numbers in spite of the fact that disadvantageous set values are set, thereby making the player more interested in the game. It is possible to prevent the decline of

If it is not the production mode A, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the current production mode is the production mode C (step 121IWS312). It should be noted that whether or not it is the production mode C can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the production mode C flag is set. If it is the effect mode C, the effect control CPU 120 determines the initial outcome using the initial effect determination table for the effect mode C (step 121IWS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 121IWS314.

20-19(B) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an initial outcome determination table for effect mode C. FIG. As shown in FIG. 20-19(B), in the initial outcome determination table for the effect mode C, odd initial outcomes are determined as compared with the setting value "3", which is the most advantageous for the player. The percentage is low, and there are no cases where it is determined as a special initial roll.

By executing the processing of steps 121IWS312 to S313, in this characterizing section 121IW, if the setting value command cannot be received normally and the effect mode is C, a disadvantageous setting value is set. To reduce a situation in which a player is rather discouraged by displaying an odd-numbered initial outcome or a special initial outcome in spite of the presence of the player, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to display the initial numbers determined in steps 121IWS309, S311 and S313 (step 121IWS314).

On the other hand, if it is not the production mode C (that is, if the current production mode is the production mode B), the production control CPU 120 determines the initial appearance to be an even initial appearance, and the image display device 5 In step 121, IWS 315 controls to display even initial numbers.

By executing the process of step 121IWS315, this characterizing section 121IW uniformly displays an even-numbered initial outcome when the set value command cannot be received normally and the production mode is B. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the situation in which the player is rather discouraged by displaying odd initial results or special initial results in spite of the fact that disadvantageous set values are set, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game. I have to.

Even if the set value command is not normally received in the performance mode B, the odd initial appearing symbols may be determined at a low rate. In this case, for example, using a table in which the determination ratio of odd-numbered initial winning symbols is set lower than the set value "1" of the initial winning determination table shown in FIG. It may be configured to determine the eye design.

In addition, in this example, when the set value command could not be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, the case of uniformly displaying even initial numbers was shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. . For example, when the set value command cannot be received normally and in the case of the production mode B, when the set value command cannot be received normally, such as a combination of “???” symbols as the initial outcome. It may be configured to display a dedicated initial roll. Any combination of symbols that does not suggest a setting value at all in some form may be displayed as an initial outcome.

Further, the processing when the setting value command cannot be received normally (or when the setting value cannot be stored normally) is not limited to that shown in this example. For example, when the result of step 121IWS 308 is N, the set value "1" may be stored in the set value storage area as a default to determine the initial outcome. Also, for example, a dedicated setting value (for example, setting value "4") indicating that the setting value command could not be received normally is stored in the setting value storage area to determine the initial output. good too.

If the received effect control command is any of the initialization designation command, the command at the time of restoration and the setting confirmation process end command (step 121IWS316), that is, when the setting change process is not executed, the effect control CPU 120 , the initial outcome is determined as an even initial outcome, and the image display device 5 is controlled to display an even initial outcome (step 121IWS317). In this characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed, the initial outcome is determined to be an even initial outcome, and is not determined to be an odd initial outcome. Either the roll or the odd initial roll may be determined. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

If the received effect control command is a RAM abnormality error notification command (step 121IWS318), the effect control CPU 120 executes RAM error notification (step 121IWS319). For example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a character display such as "A RAM error has occurred" on the image display device 5, or outputs a sound indicating a RAM error abnormality or an error sound from the speakers 8L and 8R. Also, the game effect lamp 9 and the LED are controlled to emit light in a predetermined error pattern. In this case, when the RAM error abnormality is notified, the loudspeakers 8L and 8R output a sound with the maximum volume or an error sound, or the game effect lamp 9 or the LED emits light at maximum brightness (for example, in the case of a full-color LED white light).

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (effect control command specifying a variation pattern) (step 121IWS320), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command stored in the RAM. store in the area (step 121IWS321). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step 121IWS322).

If the received effect control command is a display result designation command (whether a big hit or a small hit, a big hit type, or a small hit type is specified) (step 121IWS323), for effect control The CPU 120 stores the received display result specifying command in the display result specifying command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS324).

If the received effect control command is a pattern confirmation designation command (effect control command specifying that the stop pattern of the decorative pattern is confirmed and displayed) (step 121IWS325), the effect control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag ( step 121 IWS 326).

If the received production control command is a jackpot start designation command (production control command designating the start of a jackpot game) (step 121IWS327), the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 121IWS328).

If the received production control command is a jackpot end designation command (production control command designating the end of the jackpot game) (step 121IWS329), the production control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 121IWS330).

Whether the received effect control command is a symbol designation command (whether or not it becomes a big hit or a small hit determined in advance in the start winning judgment process (see step S101), the judgment result of the big hit type and the small hit type is specified. effect control command) (step 121IWS331), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received pattern designation command in the first vacant storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM ( step 121 IWS 332).

If the received effect control command is a variable category command (a effect control command that specifies the determination result of the variable category (variation pattern type or variation pattern) prefetched in the start winning judgment process (see step S101)) (step 121 IWS 333 ), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable category command in the storage area where the latest symbol designation command is stored among the storage areas of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM (step 121IWS334).

If the received production control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step 121IWS335), the production control CPU 120 receives the first reservation storage number addition designation command, the start winning time command formed in the RAM It is stored in the storage area in which the latest design designation command and variation category command are stored in each storage area of the storage area (step 121IWS336). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 increases the reserved display by one in the first reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and updates the first reserved memory number display (step 121IWS337). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS338).

If the received production control command is the second reserved memory number addition designation command (step 121IWS339), the production control CPU 120 receives the second reservation memory number addition designation command, the start winning time command formed in the RAM Store in the storage area storing the latest design designation command and variation category command among the storage areas (step 121IWS340). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 increases the reserved display by one in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, and updates the second reserved memory number display (step 121IWS341). Moreover, the effect control CPU 120 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS342).

If the received production control command is the first reserved storage number subtraction command (step 121IWS343), the production control CPU 120 erases one reserved display in the first reserved storage display area of the image display device 5, and the remaining Shift the pending display by one to update the first pending storage count display (step 121 IWS 344). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved memory number stored in the first reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS345).

If the received effect control command is the second reserved memory number subtraction designation command (step 121IWS346), the effect control CPU120 erases one reserved display in the second reserved memory display area of the image display device 5, the remaining The pending display is shifted by one to update the second pending storage count display (step 121IWS347). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved memory number stored in the second reserved memory number saving area (step 121IWS348).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 120 stores the received effect control command or sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step 121IWS349). Then, the process proceeds to step 121 IWS301.

In addition, in this characteristic portion 121IW, when the setting change process is not executed when the power is turned on, the initial odd numbers are not displayed. good. Also in this case, the percentage determined for odd-numbered initial results may differ according to the set value (that is, the set value may be suggested).

Further, for example, instead of or in addition to an odd initial outcome or an even initial outcome, an initial outcome that denies the possibility of being a specific set value It is also possible to provide an initial result that confirms that the value is 2 or set value 3) or that that a specific set value is set, and display them according to the set value. For example, in the case of setting value 1, by not determining a specific initial result, when a specific initial result is displayed, the possibility of setting value 1 is denied, and setting value 2 or The set value 3 is determined. Also, for example, by setting a specific initial outcome to be determined only in the case of the set value of 3, the set value of 3 is determined when the specified initial outcome is displayed. . Further, when determining the initial outcome, any one of these initial outcomes may be determined by lottery. In this case, the ratio determined according to the set value may be different.

(Setting Suggestion Effect) This characteristic part 121IW is configured so that the set value can be changed, and as the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion) that suggests the set value, the above-described initial appearance effect and the above-described variation pattern determination tendency It is configured to be able to execute setting suggestions by. In addition, a pre-game suggestive effect executed before the start of the game, a game suggestive effect executed during the game (for example, during the variable display of the decorative pattern), and a jackpot executed during the big hit (for example, during the big hit game) It may be configured to be able to execute a suggestive effect. In this case, in this characteristic part 121IW, the pre-game suggestive effect, the mid-game suggestive effect, and the jackpot-suggestive effect may be executed in a plurality of types of effect modes with different degrees of reliability of the suggestions. The reliability of the suggestion may be different for each type of . For example, the reliability of the suggestions may be increased in the order of pre-game suggestive performance > mid-jackpot suggestive performance > mid-game suggestive performance, or pre-game suggestive performance > mid-game suggestive performance > mid-jackpot suggestive performance, The reliability of the suggestion may be increased in the order of suggesting effect during game>suggesting effect during big win> suggesting effect before game, or in the order of suggesting effect during big win>suggesting effect during game>suggesting effect before game. Further, it may be configured such that the execution ratio of each setting suggestion effect can be set. For example, the administrator of the gaming machine does not execute some or all of the setting suggestive effects (for example, pre-game suggestive effects and initial appearance effects suggesting that the setting has been changed), or the execution rate The setting may be changed so as to lower (or raise) the . For example, after the power is turned on, a setting screen is displayed, and by operating operating means such as the push button 31B or operating means such as a switch provided inside the game machine (only the administrator can operate), settings related to the setting suggestion effect can be made. may be changed.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 112AK) Next, the characteristic portion 112AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the special figure per waiting process executed by the characterizing unit 112AK. In the special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time has passed (step S
600). The hit start designation command reception waiting time is set for a predetermined fixed time according to the reception of the decoration symbol stop command in the variable display effect process of step S182.

When the winning start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed in step S600 (step S600; No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot start designation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S601). . If the jackpot start designation command is received (step S601; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to "6", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot middle production process (step S602).

For the process of step S602, an effect control pattern for informing the big hit prepared in advance for informing the start of the big win game state is selected and set as a use pattern (step S604). After that, based on the performance control execution data read from the performance control pattern set as the usage pattern, the setting for starting the control of the big hit notification operation is performed (step S605). Then, right-handed instruction notification processing for performing right-handed instruction notification is performed (step 112AKS001).

In the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112AK, the normal variable winning ball device 6B and the passage gate 41 are provided in the right game area on the right side for the player. Therefore, when the high opening control is performed together with the time saving control, if the game ball is shot toward the right game area, the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning hole formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B. )It's easy to do. In addition, since the time reduction control is performed, it is possible to quickly digest the special game and shorten the time until the variable display result becomes "big hit". Thus, in the time-saving state in which high opening control is performed along with time-saving control, the optimal launching position (shooting target position) of the game ball in the game area is the right game area. In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the characteristic portion 112AK, a special variable winning ball device 7 is provided in the right game area. Therefore, when the big winning opening is changed to the open state (first state) and the closed state (second state) by being controlled to the big winning game state or the small winning game state, the game ball is shot toward the right game area. For example, there is a possibility that a large number of prize balls can be obtained as prizes by passing (entering) game balls through the big prize opening. In this way, when the big winning opening changes between the open state (first state) and the closed state (second state) in the big win game state and the small win game state, the optimal shooting position of the game ball in the game area. (Firing target position) is the right game area. In step 112AKS001, processing is performed to inform the player that the optimal shooting position (shooting target position) of the game ball within the game area is the right game area.

FIG. 20-21 is a flow chart showing an example of the right-handed instruction notification process executed in step 112AKS001 of FIG. 20-20. In the right hitting instruction notification process shown in FIGS. 20-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to perform a setting suggesting effect (setting suggesting) suggesting a set value in the right hitting instruction notification (step 112AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 112AKS002, it is determined whether or not to execute setting suggestion based on the jackpot type and according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 20-22. In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 20-22, the ratio of setting suggestions to be executed increases in the order of jackpot type A<jackpot type B<jackpot type C. FIG. In addition, the jackpot type A and the jackpot type B in this embodiment are jackpots in which the number of rounds during the jackpot game is 16 (16R jackpot), and the jackpot type C is a jackpot in which the number of rounds in the jackpot game is 4R (4R jackpot). ). That is, in the characteristic portion 112AK, the ratio of setting suggestions to be executed is lower for the jackpot types A and B, which are more advantageous to the player than for the jackpot types C, and are lower than the jackpot types A and B. The ratio of setting suggestions to be executed is higher for the jackpot type C, which has a lower degree of advantage. Therefore, the player's attention can be attracted even to the jackpot of the jackpot type C having a low advantage, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, not limited to the number of rounds, for example, a non-probable variable jackpot has a higher rate of execution of setting suggestions than a probability variable jackpot. It is sufficient that setting suggestions are made at a rate higher than that of the jackpot. Furthermore, not limited to the jackpot type, for example, in the case of setting suggestions during variable display, if the game state is normal state, setting suggestions at a higher rate than normal state (probability variable state and time saving state) It should be done.

Returning to FIG. 20-21, after executing the process of step 112AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the setting suggestion at step 112AKS002, that is, whether or not there is setting suggestion (step 112AKS003). ). If there is no setting suggestion, that is, if it is determined not to execute the setting suggestion in step 112AKS002 (step 112AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 notifies the right-handed instruction in the normal mode, that is, the right-handed hitting that does not perform the setting suggestion. It is determined to execute instruction notification (step 112AKS004). Here, the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode is performed by displaying the message "Please hit right!" like the normal-style right-handed instruction notification 112AK001 shown in FIGS. 20-24.

On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the setting suggestion in step 112AKS002, that is, if there is a setting suggestion (step 112AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution mode of the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion (step 112AKS005). Specifically, in the processing of step 112AKS005, according to the determined ratio shown in FIGS. Determined as a mode. The right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion in this embodiment is the normal mode right-handed instruction notification 112AK001 shown in FIGS. It includes a right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 of the aspect, and is an effect that suggests which set value is set by the right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 of the aspects 1 to 3. In this embodiment, the right-handed instruction notification of aspect 1 suggests that the set value is "1", and the right-handed instruction notification of aspect 2 suggests that the set value is "2". The right-handed instruction notification of 3 suggests that the set value is "3". In addition to this, instead of the setting value itself, for example, it suggests that the setting value is not "1", that it is a high setting value, that it is an even setting value, that it is an odd setting value, may be suggested by each aspect. In addition, in the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion, after performing the right-handed instruction notification 112AK001 of the normal mode shown in FIGS. A hitting instruction notification 112AK002 is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to whether or not the specific form of the right-handed instruction notification is performed after the normal form of the right-handed instruction notification is performed, and also to attract the player's attention to which form of the right-handed instruction notification is performed. It can attract the player's attention. In the characteristic portion 112AK, the combination of the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode and the right-handed instruction notification in the specific mode is called a specific notification for explaining a game. That is, in the characteristic portion 112AK, after the normal mode right-handed instruction notification is performed, the specific mode right-handed instruction notification is performed, and after the normal right-handed instruction notification is performed, the specific mode right-handed instruction information is performed. There are cases in which the hitting instruction notification is not performed, and it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific notification. FIGS. 20-24 show an example of the effect operation of the specific notification including the normal mode right-handed instruction notification and the specific mode right-handed instruction notification.

As shown in FIGS. 20 to 23, in the characterizing portion 112AK, a determination ratio is set so that right-handed instruction notification including a setting suggestion can be executed at different execution ratios according to the set values and in different execution modes. ing. Therefore, since the specific notification of different execution modes is executed at different execution ratios according to the set value, the presentation effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that specific notifications of different execution modes are executed at different execution ratios, i.e., they are simply executed in different execution modes, including different types, modes, and execution ratios of the specific notifications to be executed. There is Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-23, the right-handed instruction notification of mode 3 is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, when the right-handed instruction notification of mode 3 is performed as the specific notification, the setting value "3" is determined. On the other hand, the right-handed instruction information of mode 1 and mode 2 is determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, the reliability of the suggestion is different between when the instruction to hit to the right in mode 1 or 2 is performed and when the instruction to hit to the right in mode 3 is performed. Therefore, it is possible to execute right-handed instruction notification with different degrees of reliability of suggestion, and to enhance the presentation effect. In addition, for example, as the number of fluctuations increases, it is possible to execute right-handed instruction notification with higher reliability of suggestion, or right-handed instruction notification with higher reliability of suggestion just before the end of business than at the start of business of the game hall may be executed, or the reliability of the suggestion may differ depending on the game state. In this case, for example, a table set separately from the decision ratio shown in FIGS. What is necessary is just to determine the execution mode of notification. According to this, since the reliability of the suggestion differs depending on the situation, it is possible to enhance the presentation effect.

Returning to FIG. 20-21, after executing the processing of step 112AKS004 or step 112AKS005, the effect control CPU 120 executes the right-handed instruction notification in the determined execution mode (step 112AKS006), and ends the right-handed instruction notification processing. . Note that when the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion is executed in step 112AKS006, the specific notification shown in FIGS. 20 to 24 is executed. In addition to the display of the image on the image display device 5, the right-handed instruction notification is performed by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the game effect lamp 9 and the light emitter such as the decorative LED. may In addition, the right-handed instruction notification once performed is erased at the timing when the optimal shooting position (shooting target position) of the game ball in the game area is no longer in the right game area, such as the timing when the time saving state ends. Just do it.

Returning to FIG. 20-20, after executing the processing of step 112AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 terminates the special prize per waiting processing.

When there is no jackpot start designation command received in step S601 (step S601; No), it is determined whether or not a small hit start designation command has been received (step S608). If there is no reception of the small hit start designation command (step S608; No), the special figure per waiting process is terminated, and it waits until the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses. When the small hit start designation command is received (step S608; Yes), the value of the production process flag is updated to "4" which is the value corresponding to the production process during the small hit (step S609). End the waiting process. Also, when the winning start designation command reception waiting time elapses in step S600 (step S600; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to "0" (step S613), To end the waiting process per special figure.

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 112AK) In the above-described embodiment, as shown in FIGS. An example in which the right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 of the mode displays images of right-pointing arrows such as modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. is. As the right-handed instruction notification including the setting suggestion, for example, as the right-handed instruction notification in the normal mode, an image of a rightward arrow is displayed in addition to the message "Please hit right!" Setting suggestions may be made by displaying a character image above the arrow. Specifically, character A may be displayed in mode A, character B may be displayed in mode B, and character C may be displayed in mode C. Further, for example, depending on the reliability of the suggestion, it may be different whether the specific form of the right-handed instruction notification 112AK002 or the character is used. According to this, since the kind of setting suggestion differs according to the reliability, the range of presentation can be expanded and the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Also, in the above-described embodiment, an example was shown in which setting suggestions were included in the right-handed instruction notification, but this is just an example. The setting suggestion may be included in an effect that explains the game. Setting suggestion may be performed by displaying a specific mode. Also, for example, when explaining strategy information (for example, which type of effect has a high degree of expectation for a big hit, etc.) to a player in a moving image played during a demonstration, the display of the specific mode is used for the explanation. You may suggest settings by doing

(Description of Means Relating to Characteristic Portion 112AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 112AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 112AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs a game, which is advantageous for the player A specific notification means ( For example, the production control CPU 120 that performs right-handed instruction notification), and the specific notification means can execute the specific notification in a different execution mode according to the set value that is set (for example, set It is possible to execute a right-handed instruction notification (specific notification) including a setting suggestion at a different execution ratio according to a set value and in a different execution mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 112AK, it is possible to control to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and the advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a 4R jackpot of jackpot type C) and the first advantageous state. At least a second advantageous state (for example, a 16R jackpot of jackpot type A or B) that is more advantageous than the state is included, and the specific notification means is capable of executing the specific notification when controlled to the first advantageous state. (For example, the ratio of setting suggestions to be executed is higher for jackpot type C, which has a lower advantage than jackpot types A and B, etc.). may be a gaming machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the first advantageous state having a low degree of advantage, and to enhance the presentation effect.

As a game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 112AK, the specific notification means executes a common effect (for example, normal mode right-handed instruction notification) regardless of the set value, and then performs different execution modes according to the set value Characteristic part 112AK characterized in that it is possible to execute the specific notification so that the effect is executed by (for example, a specific mode of right hitting instruction notification is performed after the normal mode right hitting instruction notification is performed) It may be a game machine of means 1 or means 2 related to. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the specific notification is to be executed.

As a game machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 112AK, the specific notification means is a first specific notification that suggests a set value that is set as the specific notification (for example, right-handed instruction notification of mode 1 or mode 2) and a second specific notification (for example, right-handed instruction notification of mode 3, etc.) with a higher reliability of the suggested setting value than the first specific notification. It may be a game machine according to any one of means 1 to 3. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 112AK, the specific notification means can execute the specific notification in a different execution mode depending on the situation The gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characterizing part 112AK characterized by, for example, being able to execute right-handed instruction notification with a high degree of reliability of suggestion. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 112AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not correctly input, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be a game machine of any one of the means 1 to 5 related to the part 112AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 113AK) Next, the characteristic portion 113AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 20-25 are flowcharts showing an example of pre-reading notice setting processing executed by the characterizing portion 113AK. When the look-ahead advance notice setting process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not a start winning command is received (step 113AKS101). When it is determined that the starting winning command has been received (step 113AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the received starting winning command is the first starting winning port designation command received in the low base state or the high base It is determined whether it is any of the second start winning opening designation command received in the state (step 113AKS102). In the present embodiment, by executing the process of step 113AKS102, in the low base state, when the reserved memory increases based on the winning in the first start winning port, it becomes possible to execute the look-ahead prediction effect, and in the high base state. Then, when the reserved memory increases based on the winning to the second starting winning port, the pre-reading notice effect can be executed.

If it is determined to be either the first starting winning opening designation command received in the low base state or the second starting winning opening designation command received in the high base state (step 113AKS102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the final stage of pending display (step 113AKS103). The performance control CPU 120, for example, according to the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display, the pending display stage determination table shown in FIGS. Either of them is referred to according to the set value, and the final stage in the first suspension display or the second suspension display (how many stages are to be changed when the look-ahead advance notice performance is executed) is determined. It should be noted that the effect control CPU 120 may acquire the variable display result and the variation pattern of the variable display by referring to the symbol determination result designation command and the variation pattern determination result designation command included in the start winning command.

Next, determination of the final display stage of pending display will be described in detail. In the present embodiment, a look-ahead forewarning effect (holding forewarning effect) is executed in which the display mode (shape or color) of the pending display corresponding to the variable display that has not yet started is changed in stages. The pending display stage determination table shown in FIGS. 20-26 is a table for determining in advance the display mode (also referred to as "final display stage") of the pending display, which is the final stage of the change (transition) of this display mode. The pending display stage determination table, as shown in FIG. 20-26, is for determining which stage from stage 1 to stage 4 the final display stage should be for each variable display result (including jackpot type and variation pattern). is assigned a determined proportion of More specifically, the variable display result is classified into "big hit (probable / non-probable)", "big hit (probably)", "losing (super reach) / small hit", "other than above", respectively, Different decision ratios are assigned to "Stage 1", "Stage 2", "Stage 3", and "Stage 4" prepared as the final display stage.

As shown in FIG. 20-26, in the characteristic portion 113AK, the display mode of the final stage of the hold display is "white" as stage 1<"blue" as stage 2<"green" as stage 3<"green" as stage 4 Expectations for big hits are higher in the order of a certain “red”. In addition, the display mode of "white", which is stage 1, is a normal mode, and when the display mode of the final stage is determined to be "white", the display mode of the pending display does not change, that is, the pre-reading notice effect is performed. indicates that it will not be executed. Therefore, the “blue” to “red” aspects of stages 2 to 4 are referred to as specific aspects in order to distinguish them from the normal aspects. Further, in the characteristic portion 113AK, as shown in FIGS. 20 to 26, the ratio of the display mode at the final stage of the hold display differs depending on which setting value is set. Therefore, since the display mode of the pending display at the final stage differs depending on the set value, the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, in the characteristic portion 113AK, as shown in FIGS. 20-26, the execution ratio of the pre-reading advance notice effect differs depending on which set value is set (the ratio of the display state of the pending display not changing varies). ). Therefore, since the ratio of whether or not the display mode of the pending display changes according to the set value, the presentation effect can be enhanced.

Further, as shown in FIG. 20-26(C), when the setting value is "3", the display mode of the pending display at the final stage is "red", and the variable display result is "big win". On the other hand, when the setting value is other than "3", the display mode of the pending display at the final stage is "red" as shown in FIGS. 20-26 (A) and (B) Even if there is, the variable display result may be "losing". Therefore, when the setting value is "1" or "2", the display mode of the final stage suspension display is "red", and when the setting value is "3", the display mode of the final stage suspension display The degree of expectation for a big hit is lower than when is "red". As described above, in the characteristic portion 113AK, even if the display mode of the pending display at the final stage is the same, the degree of expectation for the big hit differs depending on the setting value. According to this, the degree of expectation for a big hit in the display mode of the pending display differs according to the set value, and the production effect can be enhanced.

After determining the final stage of the pending display by the processing of step 113AKS103, the effect control CPU 120 determines the final display stage determined in step 113AKS103, the first special figure pending memory number designation command and the second special figure pending memory number designation command. A display step change pattern is determined according to the number of reserved memories shown in either one (step 113AKS104). It should be noted that the number of reserved memories, when receiving the first start winning mouth designation command in step 113AKS102, the first special figure reserved memory number designation command, when receiving the second start winning mouth designation command, It may be specified by referring to the second special figure pending storage number designation command. In the processing of step 113 AKS104, the display step change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-27 to 20-30 is referenced to determine the display step change pattern for the first pending display or second pending display. The display step change pattern indicates a change pattern such as how many times of shift the transition is made to which step when changing to the final step. The display step change pattern determined in step 113 AKS104 is stored in the display step change pattern storage area in the first start winning command buffer or in the second start winning command buffer shown in .

The display stage change pattern determination table shown in FIGS. 20-27 to 20-30 is used for determining the display stage change pattern indicating the change in the display stage of the pending display to be the notice target of the pending notice effect, as described above. It is a referenced table. The display stage change pattern determination table is divided according to the number of reserved memories (the reserved display number of the reserved memory which is the notice target of the reserved notice effect) and the final display stage. Specifically, the display stage change pattern determination table is divided according to the pending number of "4" to "2" and the final display stage of "stage 1" to "stage 4". In addition, in each display stage change pattern determination table classified by the number of pending memories (number of pending) and the final display stage, "big hit (16R)", "big hit (4R)", "losing (super reach)" or "small A different decision ratio is assigned to the display stage change pattern set according to the final display stage for each variable display result (jackpot type) such as "hit".

The pending display is displayed in any one of "stage 1" to "stage 4" at the start of the pending display associated with the start winning. In addition, the pending display can be changed to a different stage each time the shift display is performed according to the digestion of the pending memory. change to In addition, the pending display may be displayed by changing the stage from the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "1" (eg, the pending display of stage 3 is performed from the beginning instead of stage 1). In addition, when changing the stage, only a change to a higher stage is allowed (there is no change from a higher stage to a lower stage), for example, "stage 1" → "stage 3", omitting the middle stage may change to

Figures 20-27(A) to 20-28(D) show when the number of pending memories (holding number) is "4" (when the pending memory of the notice target of the pending notice effect is the hold display number "4"). is a display step change pattern determination table referred to in , in which display step change patterns indicating changes in the display steps of pending displays corresponding to pending display numbers "4" to "1" are set.

FIG. 20-26(A) is a display stage change pattern determination table referred to when the final display stage is "stage 1". As shown in FIG. 21A, when the final display stage is "stage 1", the display stage change pattern in which the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" remains "stage 1" Only PT4-1-01 (the number of display stage changes "0") is set, and the determination ratio assigned to each variable display result is uniformly 100%.

FIG. 20-26(B) is a display stage change pattern determination table referred to when the final display stage is "stage 2". As shown in FIG. 21(B), as a display step change pattern, the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" remains "stage 2" and does not change PT4-2-01 (number of display step changes) "0"), "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and "stage 1" in any of the pending displays corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "1" PT4-2-02 to PT4-04 (number of times of display step change "1") are set to change from "step 2" to "step 2".

As shown in FIG. 20-26(B), when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "minor hit", display step change pattern PT4-2-01 with display step change count of "0" is higher than for other variable display results. In addition, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)" and "losing (super reach)" or "small hit", the number of times of display step change is "1". Among them, the decision percentage assigned to PT4-2-04 is the highest and the decision percentage assigned to PT4-2-01 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (4R)", the determination ratio assigned to PT4-2-02 is the highest among the display stage change patterns in which the number of display stage changes is "1", and PT4-2 The decision percentage assigned to -01 is the lowest.

With such a setting, when the display step change pattern PT4-2-01, in which the pending display remains “step 2” and does not change, is executed, it is suggested that the variable display result is likely to be “failed”. can do. Also, the earlier the display stage of the pending display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2", the more likely the variable display will be "big hit (16R)", "losing (super reach)" or "small hit". is higher and the timing is later, it can be suggested that there is a higher possibility that the variable display will result in a "jackpot (4R)". Separately from this, when the display stage change pattern PT4-2-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 2" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display step change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 2" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the display step change pattern determination table is determined so that the later the timing of the change of the display step of the pending display from the "step 1" to the "step 2", the higher the possibility of the variable display result becoming a "jackpot (16R)". You can set a percentage. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display.

FIG. 20-26(C) is a display stage change pattern determination table referred to when the final display stage is "stage 3". As shown in FIG. 20-26 (C), as a display stage change pattern, the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" remains "stage 3" PT4-3-01 (display stage number of changes "0"), "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and "stage 1" in any of the pending displays corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "1" PT4-3-02-04 (the number of display stage changes "1") that changes from " to "stage 3", and "stage 2" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and the pending display number PT 4-3-05 to 07 (display stage change number "1") that changes from "stage 2" to "stage 3" in any of the pending displays corresponding to "3" to "1", and the pending display number " "Stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to "4", "Stage 1" to "Stage 2" in any of the pending displays corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "1", and further "Stage 2" PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-10 (number of times of display step change "2") are set.

As shown in FIG. 20-26(C), when the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "minor hit", display step change pattern PT4-3-01 with display step change count of "0" PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-10 with the display stage change count of "2" are not assigned a decision ratio. In addition, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", "losing (super reach)" or "small hit", the display step change pattern PT4-3-02 to PT4-3-04 with the number of display step changes of "1" In each division of PT4-3-05 to 07, the decision percentage assigned to PT4-3-04 and PT4-3-07 respectively was the highest, and was assigned to PT4-3-02 and PT4-3-05 respectively Lowest percentage of decisions. In addition, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", the number of display stage changes from "stage 1" to "stage 2" and from "stage 2" to "stage 3" is "2". of the display step change patterns PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-10, the determination percentage assigned to PT4-3-10 is the highest, and the determination percentage assigned to PT4-3-08 is the lowest. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (4R)", in each division of display stage change patterns PT4-3-02 to PT4-3-05 to PT4-3-05 to 07 where the number of display stage changes is "1", PT4 -3-02 and PT4-3-05 are each assigned the highest decision percentages, and PT4-3-04 and PT4-3-07 are each assigned the lowest decision percentages. In addition, display step change patterns PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08 to PT4-3-08-10, in which the number of display step changes in which the pending display changes from “step 1” to “step 2” and further from “step 2” to “step 3” are “2” Among them, the decision percentage assigned to PT 4-3-08 is the highest and the decision percentage assigned to PT 4-3-10 is the lowest. That is, in each of the display step change patterns PT4-3-02 to 04, PT4-3-05 to 07, and PT4-3-08 to 10, when the hold number is '1', it changes to 'step 3' for the first time. The decision ratios assigned to the display step change patterns PT4-3-02, PT4-3-05, and PT4-3-08 are higher than the other display step change patterns.

With such a setting, when the display step change pattern PT4-3-01 is executed, in which the display color of the pending display remains “step 3” and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be “fail”. can be suggested. In addition, the faster the timing at which the pending display changes from "stage 1" to "stage 3" or from "stage 2" to "stage 3", the variable display is "big hit (16R)" and "losing (super reach)". Or the possibility of a "small hit" is high, and the later the timing, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be a "big hit (4R)". Sometimes when it changes to "Stage 3" for the first time, it can indicate that the variable indication is particularly likely to be a "big hit". Aside from this, when the display stage change pattern PT4-3-01 is executed where the pending display remains "stage 3" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display step change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 3" is performed from the beginning of winning, the player can be given a sense of security. Also, the decision ratio of the display step change pattern decision table is set so that the later the timing of the change of the display step of the pending display to "step 3", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. In addition, the determination ratio of the display step change pattern determination table is set so that the pattern that changes from "step 1" to "step 3" in multiple steps at once has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIG. 20-28(D) is a display stage change pattern determination table referred to when the final display stage is "stage 4". As shown in FIG. 20-28 (D), as a display stage change pattern, the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "4" to "1" remains "stage 4" PT4-4-01 (display stage number of changes "0"), "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and "stage 1" in any of the pending displays corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "1" PT4-4-02-04 (the number of display stage changes "1") that changes from " to "stage 4", and "stage 2" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4", and the pending display number PT 4-4-05 to 07 (display stage change number "1") that changes from "stage 2" to "stage 4" in any of the pending displays corresponding to "3" to "1", and the pending display number " PT4-4, which is "stage 3" in the pending display corresponding to "4" and changes from "stage 3" to "stage 4" in any of the pending displays corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "1" -08 to 10 (the number of display stage changes "1") and the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "3" to "1" which is "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" PT 4-4-11 to 13 (number of display step changes “2”) that changes from “step 1” to “step 2” and from “step 2” to “step 4” in any of the above, and the pending display number “4 "Stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to ", and "Stage 1" to "Stage 3" in any of the pending displays corresponding to the pending display numbers "3" to "1", and further "Stage 3" to PT 4-4-14 to 16 (number of display mode changes "2") that changes to "stage 4", and "stage 1" in the pending display corresponding to the pending display number "4" and the pending display number "3""Stage1" to "Stage 2" in the hold display corresponding to ", "Stage 2" to "Stage 3" in the hold display corresponding to the hold display number "2", Hold display corresponding to the hold display number "1" PT4-4-17 (number of times of display step change "3") is set to change from "step 3" to "step 4".

As shown in FIG. 20-28(D), when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", other variable A higher determination percentage is assigned compared to the case of display results. In addition, the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", and the display mode change pattern PT4-4-02 ~ 04, PT4-4-05 ~ 07 and PT4-4-08 ~ 10 with the number of changes in the display stage being "1" , PT4-4-04, PT4-4-07 and PT4-4-10 have the highest ratio of decisions, and PT4-4-02, PT4-4-05 and PT4-4- 08 and 08, respectively, are the lowest. In addition, when the variable display result is "big hit (16R)", in each of the display stage change patterns PT4-4-11 to 13 and PT4-4-14 to 16 where the number of display stage changes is "2", PT4 - 4-13 and PT 4-4-16 have the highest decision percentages assigned respectively, and PT 4-4-11 and PT 4-4-14 have the lowest decision percentages assigned respectively. Furthermore, in the display step change pattern PT4-4-17 in which the number of display step changes is "3", the decision ratio is set higher than in the display step change pattern PT4-4-01 in which the number of changes is "0", Moreover, a higher determination percentage is assigned compared to other variable display results. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "big hit (4R)", the display stage change patterns PT4-4-02 to PT4-4-05 to PT4-4-07 and PT4-4-08 with the number of display stage changes of "1" PT4-4-02, PT4-4-05, and PT4-4-08 had the highest proportion of decisions assigned to each of The decision percentages assigned to 4-10 respectively are the lowest. In addition, in each of the display step change patterns PT4-4-11 to PT4-4-14 to PT4-4-16, where the number of display step changes is "2", PT4-4-11 and PT4-4-14 The decision percentage assigned is the highest, and the decision percentages assigned to PT 4-3-13 and PT 4-4-16 are the lowest respectively. The display step change pattern PT4-4-17 with the number of display step changes of "3" has a higher determination ratio than the display step change pattern PT4-4-01 with the number of display step changes of "0". When the variable display result is "loss (super reach)" or "small hit", the final display mode does not become "stage 4", so the display stage change patterns PT4-4-01 to PT4-4-01 to 17 are assigned a determination ratio. not

With such a setting, when the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 4" and does not change, there is a high possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". (higher than "4R"). In addition, the sooner the timing when the pending display changes to “stage 4”, the higher the possibility that the variable display will become “big hit (16R)”, and the later the timing, the more likely the variable display will become “big hit (4R)”. It can be suggested that the Furthermore, when the stage of the pending display changes three times, it can be suggested that the variable display is likely to be a "jackpot (16R)". Apart from this, when the display stage change pattern PT4-4-01 is executed, in which the pending display remains "stage 4" and does not change, the variable display result is likely to be a "jackpot (16R)". The determination ratio of the display step change pattern determination table may be set as follows. According to this, since the pending display of "stage 4" is performed from the beginning of winning, it is possible to give the player a sense of security. Also, the determination ratio of the display stage change pattern determination table is set so that the later the timing of the change of the display stage of the pending display to "stage 4", the higher the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". good too. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the pending display. In addition, the determination ratio of the display step change pattern determination table is set so that the pattern that changes from "step 1" to "step 4" in multiple steps at once has a higher possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot (16R)". (For example, a display step change pattern with a display step change count of “1” is more likely to be a “jackpot (16R)” than a display step change count of “2”, and a display step change count of “1” Even so, PT4-4-02-04 has the highest possibility of becoming a "jackpot (16R)", followed by PT4-4-05-07, and PT4-4-08-10, which seems to be the lowest. ). According to this, it is possible to exhibit an effect (impress the player) that has been upgraded in multiple stages, and to improve the game interest.

FIGS. 20-29 (A) to (D) are display step change pattern determination tables referred to when the pending number is “3” (when the pending memory of the notice object of the pending notice effect is the pending display number “3”). , and a display step change pattern is set that indicates a change in the display step of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers “3” to “1”. In addition, FIGS. 20-30 (A) to (D) are display step change patterns that are referred to when the number of reservations is "2" (when the reservation memory for the notice target of the reservation notice effect is the reservation display number "2"). This is a determination table, and display step change patterns indicating the display steps of the pending display corresponding to the pending display numbers "2" to "1" are set.

20-29 (A) to (D) and FIGS. -28(D) has the same characteristics as the determination ratio setting in the display step change pattern determination table. The earlier the timing of the change to the final display stage of the pending display, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be a "big hit (16R)", and the later the timing, the more likely the variable display will be a "big hit (4R)". It can be suggested that there is a high possibility that In addition, it can be suggested that the higher the number of times the pending display changes, the higher the possibility that the variable display will be a "jackpot (16R)".

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the ratio of the display mode of the final stage hold display is different depending on the setting value. The ratio of whether it becomes a change pattern may be different. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the setting, instead of changing in stages in the order of "stage 1" → "stage 2" → "stage 3" → "stage 4", it goes like "stage 1" → "stage 3". It is also possible to omit the middle stage so that the rate of change to a higher stage is higher, or that the higher the set value, the earlier the timing of the change to the final display stage. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention not only to the display mode of the pending display at the final stage but also to the change pattern.

Returning to the description of the pending display setting process shown in FIGS. 20-25, in the process of step 113AKS102, the first start winning opening designation command received in the low base state and the second start winning opening designation command received in the high base state , (step 113AKS102; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the display mode of the first pending display or the second pending display to be the display mode of the first stage (step 113AKS105).

After executing the process of step 113AKS104 or step 113AKS105, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first reserved display part or the second A first pending display or a second pending display is additionally displayed on the pending display unit, and a winning sound is output (step 113AKS106).

After executing the process of step 113AKS106, or when it is determined that the start winning command has not been received in the process of step 113AKS101 (step 113AKS101; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the variation start designation command has been received. (Step 113AKS107). At step 113 AKS 107, for example, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation start designation command has been received by referring to whether either the first fluctuation start designation command reception flag or the second fluctuation start designation command reception flag is set. Judge. If it is determined that the variation start designation command has not been received (step 113AKS107; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the pre-reading notice setting process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the command for specifying the start of fluctuation is received (step 113AKS107; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 suggests that the display mode of the first pending display or the second pending display changes (or encourages) action. Action effect execution setting processing for setting effect execution is performed (step 113AKS108). The action effect setting process may include a process for determining whether or not to execute the action effect and a process for executing the action effect. Specifically, when the variable display ends and the pending display shifts (that is, when a new variable display is executed), an effect effect suggesting that the pending display will change may be executed. When the display ends and the pending display shifts (when a new variable display is executed), the image display device 5 only needs to execute a specific performance of displaying a shooting star performance image toward the pending display. Then, when the display mode of the hold display changes, a shooting star effect image (as described later, in the characteristic portion 113AK, in addition to the star-shaped image, a pentagonal image and a triangular image differ depending on the set value). percentage) collides with the pending display. In addition to the image, a pentagon image and a triangle image are displayed at different ratios depending on the set value) does not hit the suspended display, for example, disappears or deviates. be. The display mode of the pending display changes when the specific effect of the success mode is executed, and the display mode of the pending display does not change when the specific effect of the failure mode is executed. Note that the effect effect execution setting process in step S113AKS108 may be performed in the variable display start setting process in step S171.

FIG. 20-31 is a flow chart showing an example of action effect execution setting processing. When the special figure display result is "big win" or "minor win", after the end of the variable display, it shifts to a big win game state or a small win game state, so that the effect performance may not be executed. In this case, based on the display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11 (command stored in the display result designation command storage area), etc., it is determined whether the special figure display result is "losing", In the case of "losing", action effect execution processing may be executed. In addition, during the variable display before shifting to the big win game state or the small win game state, or during the big win game state or the small win game state, the action effect may be executed.

When the action setting process shown in FIGS. 20-31 is started, the effect control CPU 120 is based on how the display mode of the pending display changes or is maintained (display mode change pattern of the pending display). According to the determination ratio shown in Figure 20-32, it is determined whether or not to execute the effect effect, and the mode of effect effect in the case of execution (whether it is a success mode or a failure mode as the effect effect mode) is also determined. (Step 113AKS121). In addition, in the low base state, the look-ahead advance notice effect (suspended notice effect) can be executed in the first reserve display, and in the high base state, the reserve notice effect can be executed in the second reserve display. Therefore, in step 113AKS121, in the low base state, it is determined whether or not to execute action effects for each of the first suspension displays, and in the high base state, action effects are executed for each of the second reserve displays. determine whether or not to Note that, in this embodiment, there are cases where action effects are simultaneously executed for a plurality of pending displays. On the other hand, if it is desired to clarify the target of the effect rendering, the effect rendering may be executed for one pending display. In this case, for example, the action effect may be preferentially executed with respect to the pending display in which the display mode changes. By doing so, even though the effect effect of the failure mode is executed for one pending display, the display mode of the other pending displays that are not the target of the effect effect changes, and the effect does not mesh. It is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by this.

Whether or not it is time to change the display mode of the pending display may be specified from the display mode change pattern and the pending display number stored in the winning command buffer. For example, when the display mode change pattern PT4-3-06 (see FIG. 20-27 (C)) is stored in the pending display number 2, the display mode (display color) of the pending display is maintained at "blue". (blue → blue) is specified, and the display mode change pattern PT4-4-17 (see FIG. 20-28 (D)) is stored in the pending display number 4, the display mode of the pending display (Display color) is specified to change from "white" to "blue" (white→blue).

As shown in FIG. 20-32, when the action effect is executed when the display mode (display color) of the pending display is maintained (for example, "white→white", etc.), the action effect of the failure mode is executed. is determined, and when the action performance is to be executed when the display mode (display color) of the pending display changes (for example, ``white to blue'', etc.), it is determined to perform the action performance of the success mode. In addition, when the display mode (display color) of the pending display changes, the effect mode of the success mode of the action effect may be changed according to the number of stages that change. By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's sense of expectation for execution of the action effect. In addition to this, the execution ratio may differ according to the set value so that the execution ratio of the action effect differs according to the set value.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-32, when the display mode (display color) of the pending display changes, the action effect is more likely to be executed than when it does not change. For example, when the display mode is maintained as "white", the execution ratio of the effect effect is 3%, whereas when the display mode changes from "white" to "blue", the effect effect is executed. The ratio is 30%. In addition, when the display mode is maintained as "blue", the execution ratio of the action effect is 5%, whereas when the display mode changes from "blue" to "green", the action effect is executed. The ratio is 50%. When the display mode is maintained as "green", the execution ratio of the action effect is 0%, whereas when the display mode changes from "green" to "red", the action effect is executed. The ratio is 70%. With such a setting, it is possible to suggest to the player that the display mode of the pending display will change by executing the action effect.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending display changes by 3 steps, the ratio of execution of the action effect is higher than when the display mode of the pending display changes by 2 steps, and when the display mode of the pending display changes by 2 steps, when the display mode changes by 1 step. The ratio of execution of the effect production is higher than that.

In this embodiment, the reliability of the big win increases stepwise in the order of "white"→"blue"→"green"→"red". Then, when the display mode is maintained as "green", the specific effect is not executed. That is, when the action effect is executed when the display mode is "green", the color is always changed to "red". In other words, when the display mode is "green", the failure mode specific effect is not executed. Therefore, when the stage of the pending display (suspended notice effect) is at a predetermined level (here, "green" one step before "red"), the action effect of the failure mode is not executed (the effect effect of the success mode is not executed). This prevents the player's sense of expectation from being spoiled and the interest in the game from deteriorating.

Returning to FIG. 20-31, after executing the process of step 113AKS121, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the action effect at step 113AKS121, that is, whether or not there is action effect execution ( step 113 (AKS 122). If there is no action effect execution (step 113AKS122; No), the action effect execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if action effect execution is present (step 113AKS122; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the shape of the image to be displayed in the action effect as the type of action effect to be executed, as shown in FIGS. One of "pentagon", "triangle", and "star" is selected (step 113AKS123) at the determined ratio shown, and an image of the selected shape is displayed when the variable display ends and the hold display shifts. After setting to execute the action performance, the action performance execution setting process is terminated. In this embodiment, the "pentagon" effect effect suggests that the set value is "1", and the "triangle" effect effect suggests that the set value is "2". The effect effect of "star" suggests that the set value is "3". In addition to this, instead of the setting value itself, for example, it suggests that the setting value is not "1", that it is a high setting value, that it is an even setting value, that it is an odd setting value, may be suggested by each aspect. It should be noted that in this embodiment, even if the types of action effects are different, the action is common (only the shape is Different) examples have been shown, but the operation (that is, the action on the pending display) may differ depending on the type of effect presentation. For example, a type of action effect in which a character appears and acts on the pending display (more specifically, the character paints a color on the pending display), or a pending display such as an egg hatching. Action productions with different types of actions, such as a type of action production that changes into a different mode by cracking itself, may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 20-33, in the characterizing part 113AK, different execution ratios are set according to the set values, and determination ratios are set so that action effects can be executed with different shapes (different types). Therefore, different types of action effects are executed at different execution ratios according to the set values, so that the effects can be enhanced. Further, as shown in FIGS. 20-33, the "star" shape action effect is determined only when the set value is "3". Therefore, when a "star" shape effect effect is performed as the effect effect, the set value "3" is determined. On the other hand, the "pentagon" shape action effect and the "triangle" shape effect effect are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, when a “pentagon” shape effect effect or a “triangle” shape effect effect is performed and when a “star” shape effect effect is performed, that is, the type of effect effect to be executed The reliability of the suggestion differs depending on the Therefore, it is possible to execute different types of action effects with different degrees of reliability, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the characterizing part 113AK, even when a failure effect is executed instead of a success effect, a "star" shape effect effect is performed, but only when a success effect is executed, a "star" shape effect effect is performed. may be performed. In this case, for example, different tables are referred to depending on whether the action effect to be executed is a success effect or a failure effect. It is sufficient to refer to a table in which a determination ratio is set so that the action effect of the shape of is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 20-25, after executing the processing of step 113AKS108, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 113AKS109). When it is determined that the received variation start designation command is not the second variation start designation command, that is, the received variation start designation command is the first variation start designation command (step 113 AKS109; No), the effect control CPU 120 By referring to the display stage variation pattern stored in the display stage variation pattern storage area in the first start winning command buffer, each first pending display is changed or maintained according to the display stage variation pattern associated with each. , in the first pending display section of the image display device 5, erase the pending display of the pending display number of the pending display number "1", and change the display position of each first pending display corresponding to "2" to "4" It is moved (shifted) to the right one by one (step 113AKS110). At step 113AKS110, the action effect set at step 113AKS108 is executed before the display mode of the pending display changes.

After executing the processing of step 113 AKS110, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the reservation display number "1" in the command buffer at the time of the first start winning, and corresponds to the reservation display numbers "2" to "4". The stored contents are shifted one by one (step 113AKS111), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated.

In the processing of step 113AKS109, if it is determined that the received variation designation command is the second variation start designation command (step 113AKS109; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the display step variation pattern in the second start winning command buffer By referring to the display stage variation pattern stored in the storage area of, each second suspended display is changed or maintained according to the display stage variation pattern associated with each, and in the second suspended display unit of the image display device 5, Eliminate the pending display of the pending display number "1" and move (shift) the display position of each second pending display corresponding to "2" to "4" one by one to the left (step 113 AKS 112). At step 113AKS112, the action effect set at step 113AKS108 is executed before the display mode of the pending display changes.

After executing the process of step 113 AKS112, the effect control CPU 120 erases the storage contents of the pending display number "1" in the command buffer at the time of the second start winning, and corresponds to the pending display numbers "2" to "4". The stored contents are shifted one by one (step 113AKS113), and the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated. As a result, the pre-reading announcement effect and action effect in the characteristic portion 113AK are executed.

FIGS. 20-34 show an example of an effect operation when the action effect and the pre-reading preview effect are executed. In the illustrated example, it is assumed that the set value is "3". As shown in FIG. 20-34(A), in the decorative design display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the display screen of the image display device 5, variable display is being performed. In the first pending display portion, first pending displays H1 to H4 corresponding to pending display numbers "1" to "4" are displayed. Among these pending indications H1 to H4, the pending indication H2 is displayed in "blue", and the pending indications H1, H3 and H4 are displayed in "white" which is the normal mode. The suspension display H2 is a suspension display based on suspension storage in which the variation pattern is super reach A (losing), and the suspension display H4 is suspension display based on suspension storage in which the variation pattern determination result is super reach B (big hit). shall be an indication. 20-34(A), when it is determined to execute a "star" shape action effect, the display is shown in FIG. 20-34(B). A specific effect is executed in which a shooting star effect image 113AK001 flies toward the first reserved display H2 whose color is “blue”. Here, an example is shown in which a failure mode specific effect is executed in which the shooting star effect image 113AK001 disappears before it hits the first hold display H2. 20-34(A), the variable display being executed in FIG. Derived and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34(C), the first pending display H2 shifts to the right, but its display color remains "blue", and in FIGS. A variable display corresponding to the pending display H1 displayed in the pending display portion is started.

After that, as shown in FIG. 20-34(D), when it is determined to execute the action effect of the shape of "star" for the first pending display H4, the display color is "white". An action effect is executed in which a shooting star effect image 113AK002 flies toward the first reserved display H4. Here, an example is shown in which a successful action effect is executed in which the shooting star effect image 113AK002 collides with the first pending display H4 to change the display mode of the pending display. Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 20-34(E), the display color of the first pending display H4 changes from "white" (stage 1) to "green" (stage 3) according to the display mode change pattern PT4-4-14. is changing. 20-34(F), when it is determined to execute the "star" shape action effect, as shown in FIG. 20-34(G). , a specific effect is executed in which a shooting star effect image 113AK002 flies toward the first reserved display H4 whose display color is "green". Here, an example is shown in which a success mode specific effect is executed in which the shooting star effect image 113AK002 collides with the first suspension display H4 to change the display mode of the suspension display. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-34(H), the first suspension display H4 is shifted to the right and the display color is changed to "red". As described above, when the specific effect is executed for the pending display whose display color is "green", the specific effect of the success mode is always executed so that the display color changes to "red". It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's sense of expectation from being spoiled and the interest in the game to be lowered.

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 113AK) In the above-described embodiment, the display mode of the final stage of the pending display differs depending on which setting value is set. Although an example in which a setting suggestion (a setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value) is performed by the display mode (display mode of the final stage) is shown, this is just an example. For example, the display mode at the final stage is “blue”, and there is a super reach (story super reach) in which the story develops as an effect performed during the variable display corresponding to the suspension, and a super reach (story super reach) in which a battle is performed (battle The suggested content may be different between the case of super reach and the case of super reach. Furthermore, even when Story Super Reach is performed, the content of suggestions differs depending on whether the display mode of the final stage of the pending display corresponding to the variable display is "blue" or "green". You may do so. In other words, setting suggestions of different contents may be performed at different execution ratios depending on the combination of the display mode of the pending display in the final stage and the effect during the variable display corresponding to the pending display. According to this, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the combination of the pending display and the subsequent variation of the effect, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In addition to the pre-reading forewarning effect (holding forewarning effect) in the above-described embodiment, for example, the hold display is displayed with characters of different colors and types, and the hold of white character A has a low expectation of a big hit, and the white character Retention of B suggests that the degree of expectation for a big hit is low but is set to be high, retention of red character A has a high degree of expectation of a big hit, and retention of red character B has a high degree of expectation of a big hit, and further indicates that the setting is high. A plurality of types and colors of characters may be provided in one reserved display, such as suggesting, so that the degree of expectation for a big hit and the suggestion of a high setting can be notified respectively by making them different. According to this, the game player is clearly notified of the degree of expectation for the big hit and the suggested setting, so that the effect of presentation can be enhanced.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which a look-ahead forewarning effect (withholding forewarning effect) that changes the display mode of the on-hold display in stages is executed has been shown, but this is just an example. In addition to this, for example, active display corresponding to the variable display being executed may be performed, and the display mode of the active display may be changed (active change rendering may be performed). In this case, it is determined whether or not to change the display mode of the active display. , the display mode of the pending display should be determined as the final stage. Then, when the active change effect is executed, the execution ratio, the change pattern that sequentially changes from the pending display, the execution ratio of the action effect, etc. may be changed according to the set values. In addition, when the display mode of the final stage is "red" at the stage of the pending display, and when it changes sequentially from the pending display and becomes "red" in the active display. ”, the expectation of a big hit is higher. Even if the display mode is the same, the expectation of a big hit is different between the case of being displayed in the pending display and the case of being displayed in the active display. good too. Furthermore, depending on the setting value, the case where the active display is "red" is higher than the case where the display mode of the final stage is "red" at the pending display stage. Conversely, there may be cases.

(Description of Means Relating to Characteristic Portion 113AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 113AK, there is a conventional gaming machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 113AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the presentation effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that plays a game is provided, which is advantageous for the player. Reservation storage means that can set one of a plurality of types of setting values with different degrees (for example, one of setting values 1 to 3) and can store information related to variable display as reservation storage information (For example, CPU 103 for storing hold information in a predetermined area of RAM 102, etc.); and the CPU 120 for use, etc.), and the suspension display means can display the suspension display in one of a plurality of display modes according to the set value (for example, according to the set value Depending on the situation, the display mode of the pending display at the final stage differs, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 113AK, the plurality of display modes include a first mode (for example, a specific mode) that suggests the set value and a second mode that does not suggest the set value. The holding display means displays the holding display in either the first mode or the second mode at a different rate according to the setting value that is set. Even if the game machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 113AK is characterized by being able to display (for example, the execution ratio of the pre-reading notice effect differs depending on which setting value is set). good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 113AK, the holding display means can display the holding display so that the advantage is different according to the set value even if the holding display is in the same mode. (For example, even if the display mode of the pending display at the final stage is the same mode, the degree of expectation for the big hit differs depending on the set value, etc.) It may be two gaming machines. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 113AK, it is possible to suggest a setting value set by a combination of the display mode of the suspension display displayed by the suspension display means and the type of effect executed during the variable display. (For example, depending on the combination of the display mode of the pending display in the final stage and the effect during the variable display corresponding to the pending display, setting suggestions of different contents are performed at different execution rates, etc.) It may be a game machine of any one of the means 1 to 3 related to the part 113AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 5 related to the characterizing portion 113AK, action effect means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing action effect) for changing the display mode of the hold display by causing a predetermined image to act on the hold display is further provided. The action rendering means is capable of executing any one of a plurality of types of action renderings according to a set value (for example, different action renderings depending on the set value). The gaming machine may be any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characterizing portion 113AK characterized by, for example, being able to execute action effects with different shapes (different types) at execution ratios. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 6 related to the characteristic part 113AK, the holding display means is controlled to the advantageous state in a first display mode indicating that the expectation degree controlled to the advantageous state is the first expectation degree. A second display mode in which the expectation level is the first expectation level and suggests a set value, and a second expectation level in which the expectation level controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the first expectation level. and a fourth display mode indicating that the degree of expectation to be controlled to the advantageous state is the second degree of expectation and that the set value is set. (For example, a plurality of character types and colors are provided in one pending display, and an expectation of a big hit and a suggestion of a high setting are respectively notified, etc.). It may be any one of 1 to 5 gaming machines. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 7 related to the characteristic part 113AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be a game machine of any one of the means 1 to 6 related to the part 113AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 114AK) Next, the characteristic portion 114AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-35 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the characterizing portion 114AK. In the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, to determine whether the special figure display result is "losing". is determined (step S521). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is "losing" (step S521; Yes), for example, by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern specification command, the specified variation pattern is decorated It is determined whether or not it is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the pattern variable display mode is set to "non-reach" (step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that it is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), a combination of final stop symbols forming the non-reach combination is determined (step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, a random number value for determining the left finalized symbol updated by a random counter for effect provided in a predetermined area (such as a effect control counter setting section) of the random number circuit 124 or RAM 122 is shown. By extracting the numerical data and referring to the left finalized pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared, among the finalized decorative patterns, in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5. The left fixed decoration pattern to be stopped and displayed is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right finalized symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for performance is extracted, and the right finalized symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this manner, the right confirmed decorative design to be stopped and displayed in the "right" decorative design display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the confirmed decorative designs. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol is determined to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined decorative symbol determination table or the like. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the performance random counter is extracted, and the medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. In this manner, among the confirmed decorative symbols, the medium confirmed decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined.

When it is determined in step S522 that it is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of final stop symbols forming the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right and left decided symbols updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, By referring to the confirmed pattern determination table, etc., the symbol numbers displayed stopped together in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the confirmed decorative symbols are determined. The same decoration pattern is determined. Furthermore, numerical data indicating a random number value for medium-definite pattern determination updated by the random number circuit 124 or the effect random counter is extracted, and a medium-definite pattern determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Thus, among the confirmed decoration symbols, the middle confirmed decoration symbols to be stopped and displayed in the "middle" decoration symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 are determined. Here, for example, when the pattern number of the middle fixed decorative pattern is the same as the pattern number of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern, when the fixed decorative patterns become a big hit combination, an arbitrary value By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to or from the symbol number of the middle determined decorative symbol, the determined decorative symbol may not be a jackpot combination but be a ready-to-win combination. Alternatively, when determining the middle fixed decorative pattern, the difference (design difference) between the pattern numbers of the left fixed decorative pattern and the right fixed decorative pattern may be determined, and the middle fixed decorative pattern corresponding to the pattern difference may be set. .

When it is determined that the special figure display result is not "losing" at step S521 (step S521; No), it is determined whether the special figure display result is "small hit" or other cases. Determine (step S525). When it is determined to be a "small hit" (step S525; Yes), a combination of final stop symbols corresponding to a "small hit", such as an open chance, is determined (step S527). . As an example, when any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is specified by the variation pattern specification command, it is determined to be the final stop symbol that constitutes one of the plurality of types of open chance eyes. Determine the combination of decorative patterns. In this case, numerical data indicating a random number for determining the chance number to be updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined chance number determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to, etc., it is sufficient to determine a combination of fixed decorative symbols that constitute one of the opening chance eyes.

When it is determined in step S525 that it is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'' other than ``minor hit'' (step S525; No), the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the big hit combination is determined. (Step S526). As an example, in the process of step S526, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determination of the big hit confirmed pattern, which is updated by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193, etc., is extracted, and then stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined big-hit finalized symbol determination table, the "left", "middle" and "right" decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C and 5R on the screen of the image display device 5 are stopped and displayed. A decorative pattern having the same pattern number is determined. At this time, depending on whether the jackpot type is ``non-probability variation'' or ``probability variation'', or whether there is a promotion effect during the jackpot, etc., a different decoration pattern may be determined as a fixed decoration pattern. good.

As a specific example, when the jackpot type is "non-variable", any one decoration pattern is selected from among a plurality of types of normal symbols, and it is determined as a fixed decoration design that constitutes a non-variable big hit combination. Just do it. In addition, when the jackpot type is "probability variable", any one decorative pattern is selected from a plurality of types of normal patterns or probability variable patterns, and a fixed decorative pattern constituting a non-probability variable jackpot combination or a probability variable jackpot combination is selected. should be decided. At this time, when the fixed decoration pattern of the non-probability variable big win combination is determined, the re-lottery performance during the variable display is not notified to the effect that it is controlled to the probability variable state, but is executed corresponding to the big win game state. What is necessary is just to notify that it is controlled to a variable probability state by promotion performance during a big hit. On the other hand, when the fixed decoration pattern of the variable probability big hit combination is decided, the effect of being controlled to the variable probability state is given in the re-lottery performance during the variable display or without executing the re-lottery performance.

After executing any of the processes of step S523, step S524, step S526, and step S527, the effect control CPU 120 performs a predetermined effect execution setting process (step 114AKS001). In the predetermined effect in the characteristic portion 114AK, for example, a battle effect (common effect) in which two characters (a main character and an enemy character) battle is performed, and the result of the effect is displayed. Further, in the predetermined effect in the characteristic part 114AK, setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value) may be performed after execution of the common effect. Common effects include a success effect in which the hero wins (when the execution result is successful) and a failure effect in which the hero loses (when the execution result is a failure). If a success effect is performed (that is, if a successful display is performed as a result of a common effect), if a failure effect is performed (that is, a failure as a result of a common effect) setting suggestion is performed at a higher rate than when the display of is performed). In the predetermined effect execution setting process in step 114AKS001, the execution setting of the common effect, its effect result, and setting suggestion is performed (that is, the common effect and the setting suggestion are collectively referred to as the predetermined effect). In the common effect, the effect performed in the case of the success effect and the case of the failure effect is common, and the effect results are different. In this embodiment, an example of performing a battle effect as a common effect is shown, but it is not limited to the battle effect, and for example, a lottery effect is performed, the display result such as success or failure is displayed, or fishing is performed. It is also possible to display the success or failure depending on whether or not the fish can be caught.

FIG. 20-36 is a flow chart showing an example of the predetermined effect execution setting process. In the predetermined effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-36, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the common effect is executed (step 114AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS002, it is determined whether or not to execute the common effect based on the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIGS. 20-37. The common effect in this embodiment is a effect that is performed during the variable display, and is a effect with a higher degree of expectation for a big hit when executed than when not executed. Further, for example, the later the timing at which the common effect is executed, the higher the degree of expectation.

Following the processing of step 114AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not execution of the common effect is determined to be "present" in step 114AKS002 (step 114AKS003). If it is determined that there is no execution of the common effect (step 114AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the predetermined effect execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that execution of the common effect is "present" (step 114AKS003; Yes), the execution result of the common effect is determined (step 114AKS004). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS004, a variation pattern is specified based on the variation pattern designation command, and the execution result of the common effect is set to "success" according to the determined ratio shown in FIGS. , "failure" or "great success". As shown in FIG. 20-38, when the execution result of the common effect is "success" or "great success", the ratio of the variable display result of "big win" is higher than that of "failure". getting higher. Also, when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", a decision ratio is assigned so that super reach or higher is decided. It should be noted that the common effect in which the execution result is "great success" may be determined only when the variable display result is "big hit".

After executing the processing of step 114AKS004, exit control CPU 120 determines the type of common effect to be executed (step 114AKS006). Specifically, in the process of step 114AKS006, based on the result of execution of the common effects determined in step 114AKS004, the types of common effects are set to "Type A", "Type B", " Type C” is determined. In the common effect of "type A" in this embodiment, the main character displayed in the battle effect is character A, and in the common effect of "type B", the main character displayed in the battle effect is character B. In the "type C" common effect, the main character displayed in the battle effect is character C. In this way, instead of different types of characters displayed in the battle effects, a battle effect is performed in the common effect of "type A", and a lottery effect is performed in the common effect of "type B". In the "type C" common effect, each effect itself may be different, such as an effect of fishing.

As shown in FIG. 20-39, in the characteristic portion 114AK, the execution result of the common effect is determined according to which type of common effect among "type A", "type B", and "type C" is executed. The determination percentages are set so that the percentages of "success", "failure", and "great success" are different. Specifically, in the characteristic portion 114AK, the ratio of the execution result of the common effect differs depending on the type of the common effect to be executed, and the execution result of the common effect is "success" or " In the case of "great success", the ratio of execution increases in the order of "type C"<"type B"<"type A". In addition, since the ratio of the execution result of the common effect to be “successful” is lower than the other execution results, for example, the common effect of “Type C”, which has the lowest ratio of the execution result to be “successful”, is executed. When executed, the ratio of the execution result to be a "great success" may be higher than when the "type A" or "type B" common effect is executed. According to this, even if the common effect of "type C", which has a high percentage of "failure" as the execution result, is performed, the possibility of becoming a "great success" is higher than that of other types of common effects. Since it is high, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

Returning to FIG. 20-36, after executing the process of step 114AKS006, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the execution result of the common effect determined in step 114AKS004 is "success" or "great success". (Step 114AKS007). If the execution result of the common effect is neither "success" nor "great success", that is, if it is "failed" (step 114AKS007; No), the effect control CPU 120 terminates the predetermined effect execution setting process. On the other hand, if the execution result of the common effect is "success" or "great success" (step 114AKS007; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion execution setting process for setting the execution setting of the setting suggestion ( Step 114 (AKS008), the predetermined effect execution setting process is terminated.

FIG. 20-40 is a flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing executed in step 114AKS008 of FIG. 20-36. In the setting suggestion execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-40, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value) (step 114AKS111). Specifically, in the processing of step 114AKS111, it is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-41. The setting suggestion in the characteristic portion 114AK is an effect that can be displayed in accordance with the execution result of the common effect when the execution result of the common effect is "success" or "great success". , it is not executed. Therefore, when the execution result of the common presentation is "success" or "great success", it is possible to attract more players' interest and enhance the presentation effect. Note that even when the execution result of the common effect is "failure", setting suggestions may be executed at a lower rate than in the case of "success" or "great success". As shown in FIG. 20-41, in the characteristic portion 114AK, the ratio of setting suggestions when the variable display result is "big win" is higher than when the variable display result is "losing". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention not only to the content of the setting suggestion such as which set value is suggested by the setting suggestion, but also to whether or not the setting suggestion is executed. It should be noted that, in this embodiment, when the execution result of the common effect is "success" or "great success", the setting suggestion may not be executed, but the execution result of the common effect is "success". Alternatively, setting suggestions may be executed without fail in the case of "great success". In this case, for example, without executing the processing of step 114AKS007 shown in FIG. Whether or not to execute setting suggestions may be determined by referring to a table in which determination ratios are set, such as 100% for "executed" and 100% for "not executed" in the case of "failure". In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the execution setting of the setting suggestion is performed after performing the execution setting of the common effect, but the execution setting of the common effect may be performed after performing the setting suggestion execution setting. . In this case, for example, when the setting suggestion is executed, it is set to execute the success performance as the common performance, and when the setting suggestion is not executed, the failure performance is set to be executed as the common performance.

Returning to FIG. 20-40, after executing the processing of step 114AKS111, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined to execute the setting suggestion in step 114AKS111, that is, whether it is determined that the setting suggestion is to be executed. It is determined whether or not (step 114AKS112). When it is determined that the setting suggestion is not executed (step 114AKS112; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the execution of setting suggestion is "yes" (step 114AKS112; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the mode of execution of setting suggestion (step 114AKS113), and then performs setting suggestion execution setting processing. exit. Specifically, in the processing of step 114AKS113, the decision shown in FIG. 20-42(A) or FIG. According to the ratio, any one of setting suggestion mode 1 to setting suggestion mode 3 is determined according to the setting value. The setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" in this embodiment suggests that the setting value is "1", and the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 2" suggests that the setting value is "2". The setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" suggests that the setting value is "3". In addition to this, instead of the setting value itself, for example, it suggests that the setting value is not "1", that it is a high setting value, that it is an even setting value, that it is an odd setting value, may be suggested by each aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 20-42, in the characterizing portion 114AK, different execution ratios are set according to the set values, and determination ratios are set so that setting suggestions can be executed in different modes. Therefore, different types of setting suggestions are executed at different execution ratios according to the set values, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Also, as shown in FIGS. 20-42, the setting suggestion in the mode of "setting suggestion mode 3" is determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, when the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" is made, the setting value "3" is confirmed. On the other hand, setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1" and "setting suggestion mode 2" are determined regardless of the setting values. Therefore, when setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" or setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 2" is performed and when setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is performed, the reliability of suggestion are different. That is, the reliability of suggestion differs depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions of different types with different degrees of reliability, and to enhance the presentation effect. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 20-42(B), when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", as shown in FIG. 20-42(A), the execution result of the common effect is "success". Decision proportions are assigned such that the suggestion is more confident than if . Specifically, when the execution result of the common effect is "great success" and the set value is "1", the result is higher than when the execution result of the common effect is "successful" and the set value is "1". The determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion of the mode of "setting suggestion mode 1" is executed at the rate. In addition, when the execution result of the common effect is "great success" and the set value is "2", the ratio is higher than when the execution result of the common effect is "success" and the set value is "2". The determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion of the mode of "setting suggestion mode 2" is executed. That is, in the characteristic portion 114AK, the suggested set value has a higher reliability when the execution result of the common effect is "great success" than when it is "successful". Therefore, since the reliability of the suggestion differs depending on the execution result of the common presentation, the presentation effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that when the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" is performed, regardless of the execution result of the common effect, the setting value "3" is determined. In terms of form, the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" is made at a higher rate when the execution result of the common effect is "great success" than when it is "successful". Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention as to whether or not the execution result of the common presentation is "great success".

In addition, when the execution result of the common effect is "success" and when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", for example, when it is "great success", "success" Depending on the execution result of the common effect, such as displaying the setting suggestion display larger than in the case of becoming, using a different display color, or outputting a special sound, the same "setting suggestion mode 1" to "setting suggestion mode 3” may be displayed in a different manner. Also, for example, when the execution result of the common effect is "success" and when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", the reliability of the setting suggestion is displayed together. Alternatively, when the execution result of the common presentation is "great success", a display may be made to indicate that the reliability is higher than when the execution result of the common presentation is "success". .

Returning to FIG. 20-35, after executing the process of step 114AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 performs other effect execution settings (step S531). For example, at the start of the variable display or at a predetermined timing during execution, a performance in which a predetermined sound effect (for example, an alarm sound, a chime sound, a siren sound, etc.) is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect By executing a predetermined aspect including part or all of the aspect of the aspect in which a flash lamp included in the lamp 9 or the like shines, it is immediately announced (deterministically) that the variable display result will be a "big hit". ) may be executed in a one-shot notification mode. Alternatively, an effect of displaying a special effect image (premium image) corresponding to the variable display result being a "big win" may be executed as the notice effect during fluctuation.

As another example, in the process of step S531, regardless of the possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot", for example, a setting may be made to execute a predetermined mode of presentation for liveliness. More specifically, it suffices if a predetermined mode of effect can be executed, such as a mode in which a predetermined lamp included in the game effect lamp 9 lights up, or a mode in which a predetermined effect image of a mini character is displayed.

After that, one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance is determined as the effect control pattern (step S532). At this time, the performance control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared special figure variation time performance control patterns corresponding to, for example, a variation pattern specified by a variation pattern specification command, and sets it as a use pattern. After executing the process of step S532, for example corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern specification command, the initial value of the production control process timer provided in RAM122 is set (step S533). Next, the setting for starting the variation of the decoration pattern in the image display device 5 is performed (step S534). At this time, for example, by transmitting the display control command specified by the display control data included in the special figure fluctuation effect control pattern determined as the usage pattern in step S532 to the VDP of the display control unit 123, etc. The variation of the decorative design may be started in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative design display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the screen of the image display device 5. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2" corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S535), and then the variable display start setting process is terminated.

FIG. 20-43 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of common effect and setting suggestion (suggestive effect). As shown in FIG. 20-43(A), the variable display is started, and when the execution period of the common effect comes, the character A and the enemy character are displayed as the common effect of the type A as shown in FIG. 20-43(B). A battle presentation 114AK001 for performing a battle is performed. Incidentally, the common effect execution period is set at step 114AKS001 in FIG. 20-35. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-43(C), when the battle effect progresses and becomes a success effect, as shown in FIG. When the player wins, a message "Success!!" is displayed, and a suggestion display 114AK003 such as "Setting 3!?" The illustrated example shows an example in which setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is performed. On the other hand, in the case of a failure effect, as shown in FIG. 20-43 (D-2), the character A is defeated as a result of the execution of the common effect, and the message "Failed!!" is displayed. It should be noted that when the failure effect is executed, the setting suggestion is not executed, so the suggestion display 114AK003 is not performed in the illustrated example. It should be noted that when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", a message indicating "great success" may be displayed as in Fig. 20-43 (D-1). Unlike the case of "success", it may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize, such as being displayed in a larger size than the case of "success". Also, when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", setting suggestions may be made in a manner different from that shown in FIG. .

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 114AK) In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. In this case, even if the setting suggestion is the same mode, the reliability of the suggestion is different, but this is just an example. In addition, for example, when a setting suggestion is made, the reliability of the suggestion may differ depending on the type of common effect to be executed. In this case, for example, in step 114AKS113 of FIG. 20-40, the setting suggestion execution mode may be determined according to the determination ratios shown in FIGS. “Setting suggestion mode 1” to “setting suggestion mode 3” shown in FIGS. 20-44 suggest that the setting values are “1” to “3”, respectively, as in the above embodiment. . As shown in FIG. 20-44, in this modified example, when the type of common effect to be executed is type A, the reliability is higher when setting suggestions are executed than when type B is executed. The decision ratio is set as follows. Further, when the type of the common effect to be executed is the type B, the determination ratio is set so that the reliability is higher when the setting suggestion is executed than in the case of the type C.例文帳に追加That is, the reliability decreases in the order of type A>type B>type C when setting suggestions are made. In this way, when setting suggestions are made, the degree of reliability of the suggestion differs according to the type of common performance to be executed, thereby attracting the player's attention to the type of common performance to be executed. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Also, in this modified example, when a setting suggestion is made, the reliability of the suggestion varies depending on the type of common effect to be executed. When a setting suggestion is made, the content of the suggestion may be different. For example, if the type of executed common effect is type A, the setting suggestion indicates whether the setting value is one of "1" to "3", that is, the setting value itself is suggested, and the executed common effect If the type is type B, the setting suggestion suggests a high setting probability (for example, the probability of high setting is suggested by the number of stars), and the type of common effect executed is type C. For example, the setting suggestion may suggest that the setting value is not "1", that the setting value is an odd number, that the setting value is an even number, or the like. In this way, when setting suggestions are made, the contents of the suggestions are made different according to the type of the common presentation to be executed, so that various setting suggestions can be visually recognized, and the presentation effect can be enhanced. can be done.

(Description of Means Relating to Characteristic Portion 114AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 114AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 114AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the presentation effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs a game, which is advantageous for the player It is possible to set one of the set values (for example, one of the set values 1 to 3) from among multiple types of set values with different degrees, and suggesting effects at different ratios according to the set set value. Executable suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes setting suggestions according to set values), and After that, the suggestive effect is not executed, and the suggestive effect is executed after the effect result of the common effect becomes the second result (for example, if the execution result of the common effect is "failure", the setting suggestion is not executed, but executed if it is "successful"). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 114AK, the suggestive effect executing means, when the effect result of the common effect is the third result, sets the suggested set value more than when the second result is obtained. Execute the suggestion effect in a highly reliable manner (for example, when the execution result of the common effect is "great success", the suggestion in the case where the setting suggestion is made is higher than in the case of "success"). high reliability, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 114AK, there are a plurality of types of the common effects, and the ratio of the effect result of the common effects is determined according to which type of the common effects is executed. Means 1 or Means 2 relating to the characterizing part 114AK characterized by: different (for example, depending on the type of common presentation to be executed, the ratio of the execution result of the common presentation is different, etc.) may be a gaming machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 114AK, there are a plurality of types of the common effects, and a setting value suggested when the suggestive effects are executed according to which type of the common effects is executed. (for example, depending on the type of common effect to be executed, the reliability of the suggestion is different when the setting suggestion is made, etc.) 3 may be any game machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 5 related to the characterizing part 114AK, there are a plurality of types of the common effects, and depending on which type of the common effects is executed, the content suggested when the suggestive effects are executed is The gaming machine of any one of the means 1 to 4 relating to the characterizing part 114AK may be different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 114AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be a game machine of any one of the means 1 to 5 related to the part 114AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 115AK) Next, the characteristic portion 115AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-45 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the characterizing portion 115AK. As shown in the figure, in the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 115AK, in the predetermined effect execution setting process (see FIGS. 20-35) of step 114AKS001 in the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 114AK. Instead, in step 115AKS001, setting suggestion execution setting processing is executed. Note that other processing is the same as the variable display start setting processing executed in the characteristic portion 114AK, so description thereof will be omitted. The setting suggestion execution setting process in step 115AKS001 is a process for setting the execution of setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value). This is an effect that is executed at a higher rate than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied when a predetermined condition such as when it is time to end the game.

FIG. 20-46 is a flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing performed in step 115AKS001 of FIG. 20-45. In the setting suggestion execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-45, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion is to be executed (step 115AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 115AKS002, the variable display to be executed is a variable display that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state, that is, whether it is a variable display of the time saving end time, based on FIG. -47 determines whether or not to execute setting suggestions. The time-saving end time is the final time of the special game of the number of times set at the end of the jackpot game state (for example, if the set number is "100", the 100th variable display after the end of the jackpot). Say. Then, in step 115AKS002, whether or not it is the variable display of the time saving end times is determined by comparing the count value counted each time the variable display is executed in the time saving state and the number of times set at the end of the jackpot. (In addition, if the time-saving count value set at the end of the big hit is subtracted at the end of the variable display, whether the time-saving count value is "1" It is sufficient to determine whether or not it is a time-saving end time depending on whether). In addition, when the variable display of the time-saving end times is completed, the time-saving flag indicating the time-saving state and the count value (including the number of times set at the end of the big hit) are cleared.

As shown in FIG. 20-47, in the characteristic portion 115AK, when the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the time saving end times, it is higher than (including the case of the normal state instead of the time saving state) Decide to implement the setting suggestions in proportion. Therefore, it is possible to attract the player's attention to the variable display of the time-saving ending time, and to enhance the presentation effect. In the illustrated example, the setting suggestion is executed even when the variable display to be executed is not the time-saving end time (including the normal state), but only when it is the time-saving end time It may decide to implement the setting suggestion. In addition, in the process of step 115AKS002, in addition to whether or not it is a variable display of time-saving end times, the setting suggestion execution ratio may differ depending on whether or not the variable display result is a "jackpot". For example, if it is a variable display of the time-saving end times and the variable display result is "big hit" > If it is a variable display of the time-savings end times and the variable display result is "losing" > Not the variable display of the time-saving end times , When the variable display result is "big hit" > When the variable display result is "loss" instead of the variable display of the time saving ending time, the setting suggestion execution ratio may be lowered in this order. Also, instead of the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may differ according to the set setting value. For example, variable display of time-saving end times and setting value is "3" > variable display of time-saving end times and setting value of "2" > variable display of time-saving end times, setting If the value is "1" > If the setting value is "3" instead of the variable display of the time saving end time > If the setting value is "2" instead of the variable display of the time saving end time > Time saving end time The setting suggestion execution ratio may be lowered in the order such as when the setting value is "1" instead of the variable display. That is, in addition to whether it is a variable display of time-saving end times, setting suggestion may be performed at a different rate according to the set value. Furthermore, regardless of whether or not the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the time-saving end times, setting suggestions may be executed at different rates according to the set values.

Returning to FIG. 20-46, after executing the processing of step 115AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the setting suggestion in step 115AKS002, that is, whether or not there is setting suggestion execution ( step 115AKS003). If there is no setting suggestion execution (step 115AKS003; No), the setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a setting suggestion execution (step 115AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is a variable display that satisfies the end condition of the time saving state, that is, the variable display of the time saving end times. (step 115AKS004). If it is not a variable display of the time saving end times (including the case of normal state) (step 115AKS004; No), the effect control CPU 120 selects the normal table shown in FIG. 20-48 (A) as a reference table. (Step 115AKS005). On the other hand, if it is a variable display of time-saving end times (step 115AKS004; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects the special table shown in FIG. 20-48(B) as a reference table (step 115AKS005).

The normal table and special table shown in FIG. 20-48 are tables that are referred to in order to determine the mode of execution of setting suggestions (to perform the processing of step 115AKS007, which will be described later). A determination ratio is assigned to each of "setting suggestion mode 1" to "setting suggestion mode 3" as the mode of execution of the suggestion according to the set value. The setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" in this embodiment suggests that the setting value is "1", and the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 2" suggests that the setting value is "2". The setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" suggests that the setting value is "3". In addition to this, instead of the setting value itself, for example, it suggests that the setting value is not "1", that it is a high setting value, that it is an even setting value, that it is an odd setting value, may be suggested by each aspect.

In the normal table shown in FIG. 20-48(A), as illustrated, the determination ratio is set so that the setting suggestion of the mode of "setting suggestion mode 3" is determined only when the setting value is "3". It is Therefore, when the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" is made, the setting value "3" is confirmed. On the other hand, setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1" and "setting suggestion mode 2" are determined regardless of the setting values. Therefore, when setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" or setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 2" is performed and when setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is performed, the reliability of suggestion are different. That is, the reliability of suggestion differs depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions of different types with different degrees of reliability, and to enhance the presentation effect. On the other hand, in the special table shown in FIG. 20-48(B), unlike the normal table, setting suggestions in the mode of "setting suggestion mode 3" are set values "1" to "3". The determination ratio is set so that any of the above can be determined. Therefore, in the variable display of the time-saving end times, the setting suggestion that suggests that the setting value is "3" (that is, in the high setting The percentage of setting suggestions that suggest that there is something) is high. On the other hand, in the variable display of the time saving end time, the setting suggestion of the mode of "setting suggestion mode 3" can be determined regardless of the setting value "1" to "3", so the time saving end time is variable The reliability of the suggestion is lower than when it is not displayed (including when it is in a normal state). Here, when the variable display of the time saving end times ends, the time saving state ends. Therefore, when the variable display of the time-saving end times ends, the player often ends the game, thinking that the advantageous state has ended. In the characteristic part 115AK, the setting suggestion indicating the high setting is executed at a higher rate than the variable display other than the time-saving end times in the variable display of the time-saving end times, so that the game of the player is continued. can improve the operating rate. In addition, although the reliability of the suggestion is low, the variable display of the time-saving end times suggests that the setting value is “3” more than the case where the time-saving end time is not variable (including normal state). Since the setting suggestion (that is, the setting suggestion that suggests a high setting) is performed at a high rate, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the setting suggestion that suggests a high setting, and the game can be continued. can improve the operating rate.

Returning to FIG. 20-46, after executing the processing of step 115AKS005 or step 115AKS006, the effect control CPU 120 is based on the table selected in step 115AKS005 or step 115AKS006, according to the set value, setting suggestion mode to be executed is determined (step 115AKS007), and the setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. In addition, in the process of step 115AKS007, it is only necessary to determine the execution mode of the setting suggestion and also determine the execution timing of the setting suggestion (including the setting suggestion execution period). When the setting suggestion execution setting process is performed in step 115AKS001 and the setting suggestion execution setting is performed in this way, the setting suggestion is executed during the setting suggestion execution period in the effect process during variable display in step S172. In addition, for example, the setting suggestion mode in the special table shown in FIG. 20-48 (B) is more likely than the setting suggestion mode in the normal table shown in FIG. The setting suggestion may be performed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the setting suggestion performed in times other than the time-saving end times (including the case of the normal state). That is, the setting suggestion mode 1 determined based on the special table is displayed larger, the brightness is higher, or the output volume is louder than the setting suggestion mode 1 determined based on the normal table. , may be in a form that is easy for the player to recognize. According to this, the continuation of the game can be promoted, and the operating rate can be improved.

FIG. 20-49 is a diagram showing an example of the setting suggestion rendering operation executed by the characterizing portion 115AK. As shown in FIG. 20-49 (A), at the end of the jackpot game state, the number of times of variable display in which the time reduction control is performed is reported (20 times in the illustrated example). Then, when the jackpot game state is finished and the variable display is started, setting suggestions are made as shown in FIG. 20-49(B). In the example shown in FIG. 20-49 (B), since the variable display is not the 20th variable display that is the time saving ending time, the normal table is selected at step 115AKS005 in FIG. 20-46, and based on the normal table A setting suggestion of the mode determined by the method is performed. Then, as shown in FIG. 20-49 (C), when the variable display of the 20th time, which is the time saving ending time, is started, a special table is selected in step 115AKS006, and the mode determined based on the special table is suggested. In the example shown in FIG. 20-49(B), the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 2” is performed, and in the example shown in FIG. 20-49(C), the setting suggestion of “setting suggestion mode 3” is performed. It shows the case when it is broken. In addition, in the illustrated example, the setting suggestion to be executed in the time saving end time is larger than the setting suggestion to be performed outside the time saving end time (including when it is in a normal state), and A case is shown in which the mode of the display frame is changed so that the game is executed in a mode that is easy for the player to recognize. Also, as described above, regardless of the setting value, the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" can be performed in the time saving end time (because it is performed at a higher rate than other than the time saving end time) The example shown in FIG. 20-49(C) shows the case where setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is performed. In this way, the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" in the variable display of the time saving ending time, that is, the setting suggestion suggesting the high setting is performed, so that the game is ended in accordance with the end of the time saving state. It is possible to suppress the fact that the game is put away, and favorably promote the continuation of the game. In addition, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion can be executed even at times other than the time saving end times (including the case of the normal state), but the setting suggestions may not be executed at times other than the time saving end times. . Further, for example, the execution ratio of the setting suggestion may be increased as the variable display of the time-saving end times is approached. Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-47, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion is not executed in the variable display of the time-saving end time, but the setting suggestion is always made in the variable display of the time-saving end time. may be performed. Moreover, setting suggestion may be made regardless of whether it is time of the time saving end. Game data (number of fluctuations, number of jackpots, number of balls paid out, percentage of consecutive games, etc.) over several days, such as five days, is stored, and based on the stored game data, settings to be executed on that day are suggested. may be different in execution mode or execution ratio. Specifically, when the set jackpot probability is 1/300 and the jackpot probability stored as game data for five days is 1/500, the setting suggestion ratio may be increased. In addition, when the number of payout balls on the previous day is 10000 or more in difference balls, the setting suggestion in the mode of suggesting the high setting may be executed at a high rate even if the setting is low.

(Modified example of characteristic part 115AK) In the above embodiment, when the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the time saving end times, the setting suggestion is performed at a higher rate than the case of the variable display other than the time saving end times. This is just an example. In the characteristic part 115AK, if the suggestive effect suggesting the high setting is executed at a high rate at the timing at which the player ends the game (the timing at which the predetermined condition is satisfied), the time-saving end times are variable. The timing at which the predetermined condition is established is not limited to the timing during display, and may be any timing. For example, the timing at the end of consecutive big hits, the timing at which the player's usage amount reaches a specific amount such as 10000 yen, the predetermined variable display number (for example, 100 times after the probability variable state ends) The timing when the game reaches the target, the timing when the all-at-once production that is performed simultaneously on all the predetermined game machines installed in the game hall ends, the timing when the background showing the variable latency state switches to the normal background, 1 hour before the game hall closes The timing at which the predetermined condition is established, such as the timing set by a timer such as the timing of , may be any timing. Further, the timing at which the predetermined condition is established may be multiple timings, as long as the manager of the gaming machine can set the timing. In addition, the timing at the end of Renso, for example, from the first big hit, the big hit in the time saving state is a continuous big hit (Renso), and the end of the time saving state is determined as the timing at the end of Renso. Just do it. Also, regarding the timing when the amount used by the player reaches a specific amount such as 10,000 yen, for example, when the player presses the ball lending button 20 times, the amount reaches the specific amount (10,000 yen in this case). You should judge that. Simultaneous production, for example, is performed in real time for a plurality of pachinko gaming machines 1 installed in the game hall during the period during which the game balls are being shot or during the period during which the game balls are not being shot even during the period when the variable display is not performed. This is an effect that is performed all at once at predetermined intervals, such as each time a predetermined time has come by the clock function (RTC function) or each time a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the power was turned on. Then, the end timing of the all-at-once performance may be determined by the elapse of the execution period of the all-at-once performance from the time predetermined by the RTC function. In addition, the probability variation latency refers to what makes it difficult to identify whether it is controlled to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot game state, for example, regardless of whether it is controlled to the probability variation state Display a common background image By doing so, it means to make it difficult to identify whether or not it is controlled in a variable probability state. Then, the timing of switching from the background showing the probability variation latency state to the normal background is a normal background image indicating that the probability variation is not hidden from the common background image (for example, the background image displayed during the normal state) It suffices to determine the timing of switching to . In the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the setting suggestion is performed when the variable display of the time saving end times is performed. can be

(Description of Means Relating to Characteristic Portion 115AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 115AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 115AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the presentation effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs a game, which is advantageous for the player One setting value (for example, one of setting values 1 to 3, etc.) can be set from among multiple types of setting values with different degrees, and a suggestive effect can be executed according to the set setting value. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 for executing setting suggestion according to a set value), and said suggestion effect execution means executes said suggestion effect when a predetermined condition is satisfied. (For example, when the variable display to be executed is the variable display of the time saving end time, the setting suggestion is executed, etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 115AK, the suggestive effect execution means is set as the suggestive effect at a higher rate when the predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Suggests that the setting value that is set is a setting value with a high degree of advantage for the player among multiple types (for example, in the variable display of the time-saving end times The game machine of the means 1 relating to the characterizing part 115AK characterized by, for example, executing at a higher rate than the variable display other than the above. According to such a configuration, the continuation of the game can be promoted, and the operating rate can be improved.

As a game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 115AK, the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, set by variable display other than the time shortening end time When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggestive effect is executed at a higher rate than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, while when the predetermined condition is not satisfied The reliability of the set value suggested than the suggested production executed in (for example, in the variable display of the time-saving end times, the setting suggestion that suggests high setting is higher than the variable display other than the time-saving end times The game machine of the means 1 or 2 relating to the characterizing part 115AK may be such that the reliability of the suggestions is low even though the game is executed at a high rate. According to such a configuration, the continuation of the game can be promoted, and the operating rate can be improved.

As a game machine of means 4 related to the characteristic part 115AK, the suggestive effect execution means can execute the suggestive effect even when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, set by variable display other than the time saving end time When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the suggested effect is executed in a manner in which the suggested setting value is easier to recognize than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied (for example, The setting suggestions that are executed in the time-saving end times are made in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the setting suggestions that are made in times other than the time-saving end times (including cases in which it is in a normal state), etc.) It may be a game machine according to any one of means 1 to 3 related to the characteristic part 115AK characterized by: According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 115AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be any game machine of the means 1 to 4 related to the part 115AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 116AK) Next, the characteristic portion 116AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-50 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the characterizing portion 116AK. As shown in the figure, in the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 116AK, in the predetermined effect execution setting process (see FIGS. 20-35) of step 114AKS001 in the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 114AK. Instead, in step 116AKS001, setting suggestion execution setting processing is executed. Note that other processing is the same as the variable display start setting processing executed in the characteristic portion 114AK, so description thereof will be omitted. The setting suggestion execution setting process in step 116AKS001 is common to the setting suggestion execution setting process in the feature part 115AK in that it is a process of setting the execution of a setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value). is an effect that is performed during variable display, and is an effect that is executed at a higher rate when a predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. is an effect that is executed regardless of a predetermined condition such as the characteristic portion 115AK, and is different in that it is an effect that is easily recognized by the player depending on the execution mode. In the setting suggestion execution setting process of step 116AKS001 in the characteristic portion 116AK, the setting suggestion execution setting different from that in the characteristic portion 115AK is thus performed.

FIG. 20-51 is a flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion execution setting processing performed in step 116AKS001 of FIG. 20-50. In the setting suggestion execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-51, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion is to be executed (step 116AKS002). Specifically, in the process of step 116AKS002, it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion is to be executed based on the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-52. The setting effect in this embodiment is an effect performed during the variable display, and when executed, the expectation of a big hit is higher than when it is not executed. Further, in the process of step 116AKS002, for example, the later the timing at which the setting suggestion is executed, the higher the degree of expectation. may Also, instead of the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may differ according to the set setting value. For example, the setting suggestion execution ratio may decrease in the order of setting value "3">setting value "2">setting value "1". Furthermore, in addition to the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may differ according to the set setting value. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the set value is "3"> when the variable display result is "loss" and the set value is "3"> when the variable display result is "big hit" Yes and the set value is "2"> The variable display result is "losing" and the set value is "2"> The variable display result is "big win" and the set value is "1" The setting suggestion execution ratio may decrease in the order of case > variable display result is “no” and setting value is “1”.

Returning to FIG. 20-51, after executing the processing of step 116AKS002, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the setting suggestion in step 116AKS002, that is, whether or not there is setting suggestion execution (step 116AKS003). If there is no setting execution suggestion, that is, if it is determined not to execute setting suggestion in step 116AKS002 (step 116AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined to execute the setting suggestion at step 116AKS002, that is, if there is a setting suggestion (step 116AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the setting suggestion execution mode (setting suggestion mode) (step 116AKS004). ), and the setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 116AKS004, any one of "setting suggestion mode 1" to "setting suggestion mode 3" is selected based on the set value and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-53. is determined as the execution mode of

"Setting suggestion mode 1" in this embodiment is a presentation of a mode of vibrating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, and suggests that the set value is "1" (Fig. 20). -54(A)). In addition, "setting suggestion mode 2" is an effect in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated and a voice is output, suggesting that the setting value is "2" ( See Figure 20-54(B)). "Setting Suggestion Mode 3" is a mode in which the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, sound is output, display is performed on the image display device 5, and various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 are lit. This is an effect, suggesting that the set value is "3" (see FIG. 20-54(C)). That is, the setting suggestions in the characteristic portion 116AK are arranged in the order of "setting suggestion mode 1"<"setting suggestion mode 2"<"setting suggestion mode 3" so that the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content). It's becoming Therefore, the easiness of recognizing the suggested contents differs depending on the mode of setting suggestion to be executed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. In addition, since the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 1" is a mode of vibrating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, it is a mode that only the player can recognize, and the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3". The setting suggestion is an effect in which the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, voice is output, display is performed on the image display device 5, and various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9 are lit. Therefore, it can be recognized not only by the player but also by other players and game staff. In this way, in the characterizing portion 116AK, setting suggestion of a mode recognizable only by the player and setting suggestion of a mode recognizable by the non-player are performed, so that the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, setting suggestions suggesting a low set value are made in a manner recognizable only by the player, and setting suggestions suggesting a high set value are recognizable by non-players. Since the setting is suggested in the mode, the high setting can be recognized by people other than the player, and the low setting value is not recognized by anyone other than the player, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. . For example, the easiness of recognition may be varied by varying the size or hue of the display on the image display device 5 . In addition, there may be a setting suggestion for operating the character object. In addition to this, instead of the setting value itself, for example, it suggests that the setting value is not "1", that it is a high setting value, that it is an even setting value, that it is an odd setting value, may be suggested by each aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 20-53, in the characterizing portion 116AK, the setting suggestions are executed in different execution ratios and in different execution modes according to the set values, so that the setting suggestion is executed according to the set values. A decision ratio is set for Therefore, setting suggestions of different execution modes are executed at different execution ratios according to the set values, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-53, the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, when the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" is made, the setting value "3" is confirmed. On the other hand, setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1" and "setting suggestion mode 2" are determined regardless of the setting value. Therefore, the reliability of the suggestion is different between the case where the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" or "setting suggestion mode 2" is made and the case where the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is made. It's becoming That is, in the characteristic part 116AK, the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" that allows the player to easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) is the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 1" and the "setting suggestion mode 2". The reliability of the suggestion is higher than the Note that, for example, the reliability of the suggestions may be increased in the order of “setting suggestion mode 1”<“setting suggestion mode 2”<“setting suggestion mode 3”. That is, the reliability of the suggestion may be set to increase in the order in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the content of the suggestion).

Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the player can easily recognize setting suggestions (that is, suggested contents) in the order of "setting suggestion mode 1"<"setting suggestion mode 2"<"setting suggestion mode 3". However, apart from this, even if the setting suggestion suggests that the setting is "1", there is a mode in which the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is only vibrated, and a mode in which the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated and further displayed on the image display device 5. Even if the setting suggestion suggests the same set value, a mode in which the player can easily recognize and a mode in which it is not so are provided. Either aspect may be determined at different determination ratios accordingly.

At step 116AKS004 in FIG. 20-51, the setting suggestion execution mode (setting suggestion mode) is determined, and the setting suggestion execution timing and the like (including the setting suggestion execution period) are determined accordingly. In the characteristic part 116AK, the execution period of the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) is set to the "setting suggestion mode 1" and the "setting suggestion mode 2". Set to a longer period than suggested. The setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" vibrates the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, outputs sound, further displays on the image display device 5, and lights various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9. Since the presentation is in the form of causing the player to recognize the character, not only the player but also other players, game clerks, and other people around the player can recognize the character. Therefore, by setting the execution period of the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" to a period longer than the setting suggestions of the "setting suggestion mode 1" and the "setting suggestion mode 2", other players, etc. It is possible to allow players other than the players of the pachinko game machine 1 to more preferably recognize that the setting suggestion indicating the high setting has been made, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 116AK) The setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" in the above-described embodiment has shown an example in which the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is vibrated, but this is just an example. be. In addition to this, for example, any mode may be used as long as it is recognizable only by the player, such as vibrating the push button 31B. Note that the modes recognizable only by the player include modes that are unrecognizable by others and modes that are difficult for non-players to recognize. Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 1" is not limited to the effect of vibrating the hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or the push button 31B. In the image display device 5, the message is displayed in a form (small display size, display in the same color as the background color, etc.) that is difficult for the player of the pachinko game machine installed next to the pachinko game machine 1 to recognize. Also, outputting a sound at a volume that is difficult for a player of a pachinko game machine installed next to the pachinko game machine 1 to recognize is included.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the execution period of the setting suggestion of the "setting suggestion mode 3" in which the player can easily recognize the setting suggestion (that is, the suggested content) is changed to the "setting suggestion mode 1" and the "setting suggestion mode 2". is set to a longer period than suggested in , so that not only the player but also surrounding people such as other players and game clerks can more preferably recognize it, but this is just an example. is. For example, on the contrary, the execution period of setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" may be set to a period shorter than setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1" and "setting suggestion mode 2". . According to this, it becomes difficult for surrounding people to recognize that the high setting is suggested, so that the player of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be given a special feeling.

(Description of Means Related to Characteristic Portion 116AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 116AK, conventionally, there is a game machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 116AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs a game, which is advantageous for the player One setting value (for example, one of setting values 1 to 3, etc.) can be set from among multiple types of setting values with different degrees, and a suggestive effect can be executed according to the set setting value. Suggestive effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120 that executes setting suggestions according to set values), and the suggestive effect executing means has a plurality of suggestive effects that are different in recognizability. It is possible to execute a type of suggestion effect (for example, setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" is easier to recognize than setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1" or "setting suggestion mode 2"), It may be a game machine characterized by According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of means 2 related to the characteristic part 116AK, among the plurality of types of suggestive effects, the suggestive effect that is easy to recognize has a higher reliability of the set value that is suggested than the suggestive effect that is difficult to recognize (for example, "setting The setting suggestion of "suggestion mode 3" has a higher reliability than the setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1" and "setting suggestion mode 2"). machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 3 related to the characteristic part 116AK, among the plurality of types of suggestive effects, the suggestive effect that is easy to recognize has a longer period of suggesting the set value than the suggestive effect that is difficult to recognize (for example, the period set by the player is For example, setting the execution period of setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3" to be longer than setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1" and "setting suggestion mode 2" in which the suggestion (that is, suggested content) is easy to recognize. ), the gaming machine of the means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic part 116AK characterized by: According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 116AK, a plurality of types of suggestive effects with different recognizability include a suggestive effect in which only the player can recognize the suggested set value (for example, vibrating the hitting operation handle 30 and a suggestive effect in which a person other than the player can also recognize the suggested set value (for example, the hitting operation handle 30 is vibrated, a sound is output, and an image display device 5 and lighting various lamps such as the game effect lamp 9). good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 5 related to the characteristic part 116AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be any gaming machine of the means 1 to 4 relating to the part 116AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 117AK) Next, the characteristic portion 117AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-55 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting suggestion mode setting process executed by the characterizing portion 117AK. The setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIG. 20-55 is a process executed in the effect control process process of step S76 (more specifically, after the process of step S161 in FIG. 7, etc.). In the characteristic part 117AK, a plurality of different setting suggestions (setting suggestion effects that suggest setting values) execution ratio, execution timing, suggestion method, etc. are operated by an operation by a gaming machine manager (game manager) such as a game clerk. Any mode (setting suggestion mode) can be selected from the modes. That is, in the characteristic portion 117AK, settings regarding setting suggestions can be made. Specifically, when a game manager such as a game clerk presses a setting suggestion mode switch for setting a setting suggestion mode (a position where only the game manager can operate the performance control board 12 (for example, the pachinko game machine 1 The effect control CPU 120 selects the setting suggestion mode according to the operation of the game manager which is performed continuously. The setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIG. 20-55 is a process of selecting one of the setting suggestion modes based on pressing of the setting suggestion mode switch. After the setting suggestion mode switch provided on the back side of the pachinko game machine 1 is pressed, the plurality of setting suggestion modes are displayed on the image display device 5. By the operation of , one of the setting suggestion modes can be selected. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a setting suggestion mode in which combinations of the setting suggestion execution ratio, execution timing, and suggestion method are preset is selected from among a plurality of setting suggestion modes. , execution timing, and suggestion method may be individually selectable. Note that, for example, the setting suggestion mode setting process may be executed within a predetermined period (for example, within 3 seconds) after the power is turned on. In this case, any one of the setting suggestion modes may be selected by pressing the setting suggestion mode switch within a predetermined period after the power is turned on.

In the setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIG. 20-55, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion mode setting screen is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117AKS001). The setting suggestion mode setting screen, for example, as shown in FIG. 20-59(A), is a screen that displays a list of a plurality of prepared setting suggestion modes and allows the game manager to select one of the modes. . If the setting suggestion mode setting screen is not being displayed (step 117AKS001; No), it is determined whether or not a setting suggestion mode designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS002). If the setting suggestion mode designation command is not received from the main substrate 11 (step 117AKS002; No), the setting suggestion mode setting process is terminated.

If the setting suggestion mode designation command is received from the main substrate 11 (step 117AKS002; Yes), the setting suggestion mode setting screen for selecting one of the setting suggestion modes is displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117AKS003). . Subsequently, in step 117AKS001, when the setting suggestion mode setting screen is being displayed (step 117AKS001; Yes), or after the setting suggestion mode setting screen is displayed in the process of step 117AKS003, the setting suggestion mode is activated by the operating means. It is determined whether or not a selection operation has been performed (step 117AKS004). If there is no setting suggestion mode selection operation (step 117AKS004; No), the setting suggestion mode setting process is terminated.

If the setting suggestion mode selection operation is performed (step 117AKS004; Yes), for example, information that can specify the selected setting suggestion mode is stored in the setting suggestion mode storage area of the effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122. to store the selected setting suggestion mode (step 117AKS005). It should be noted that any setting suggestion mode may be stored as an initial value in the setting suggestion mode storage area. For example, "setting suggestion mode 2" is stored as an initial value. After the processing of step 117 AKS005, the setting suggestion mode setting processing is terminated. When the setting suggestion mode is stored in step 117 AKS005, the setting suggestion mode may be displayed on the screen display device 5 or the like so that the game manager can recognize it.

As shown in FIG. 20-56, the characteristic part 117AK has a plurality of setting suggestion modes such as "setting suggestion mode 1" to "setting suggestion mode 3", and one of them is selected based on the operation of a game manager such as a game clerk. The setting suggestion mode will be selected. "Setting suggestion mode 1" has the highest execution ratio of setting suggestion, and can be executed at any time as the execution timing of setting suggestion. This is the mode in which setting suggestion can be executed. "Setting suggestion mode 2" is a mode in which the execution ratio of setting suggestion is lower than that of "setting suggestion mode 1" and higher than that of "setting suggestion mode 3" described later. It is a mode that can be executed at the timing such as during fluctuation or during a big hit, and can execute setting suggestions by methods such as "sound", "image", and "vibration" as suggestion methods. "Setting suggestion mode 3" has the lowest execution ratio of setting suggestion, and can be executed at the timing of the reach production during fluctuation or during the big hit as the execution timing of setting suggestion. It is a mode in which setting suggestions can be executed by a method such as That is, the execution ratio decreases in the order of "setting suggestion mode 1" > "setting suggestion mode 2" > "setting suggestion mode 3", the execution timing is limited, and the number of suggestion methods also decreases. In this manner, in the setting suggestion mode setting process in the characteristic portion 117AK, various settings related to setting suggestion are possible. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions in various modes depending on settings related to setting suggestions, thereby enhancing the presentation effect. In addition, in the setting suggestion mode setting processing in the characteristic part 117AK, the setting suggestion mode can be set based on the operation by the game manager such as the game clerk. can be done. In addition to the illustrated example, for example, whether to increase or decrease the execution ratio of a setting suggestion that suggests a specific content, such as a setting suggestion that the setting value is determined to be "3" (whether to execute or not) (including setting) may be possible.

FIG. 20-57 is a flow chart showing an example of setting suggestion pattern setting processing executed by the characterizing portion 117AK. The setting suggestion pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-57 is a process executed during the variable display start waiting process in step S170. In the characteristic part 117AK, as described above, the execution ratio, execution timing, and method of setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a setting value) are controlled by an operation by a gaming machine administrator (game manager) such as a game clerk. One mode (setting suggestion mode) can be selected from a plurality of different modes such as. In the setting suggestion pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-57, specific setting suggestion execution timing, suggestion method, and display position on the image display device 5 are performed within a range according to the setting suggestion mode set by the game manager. A setting suggestion pattern (setting suggestion pattern) such as (image display position) is set according to the player's operation (operation on the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B). In the setting suggestion pattern setting process in the characterizing portion 117AK, a process of selecting a setting suggestion pattern according to the setting suggestion mode from among a plurality of setting suggestion patterns according to the player's operation is executed. That is, in the characteristic portion 117AK, first, a setting suggestion mode is set by a game manager such as a game clerk, and then a setting suggestion pattern corresponding to the setting suggestion mode set by the game manager is set by the player. Therefore, the player can set the suggested setting pattern within the range set by the game administrator such as the game clerk, so that the setting can be made in accordance with the game environment and the effect can be enhanced. Both the setting suggestion mode and the setting suggestion pattern may be settable by the game manager. Also, both the setting suggestion mode and the setting suggestion pattern may be settable by the player. According to this, it is possible for the player to make various settings related to the setting suggestion, and it is possible to enhance the presentation effect. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which a setting suggestion pattern in which combinations of setting suggestion execution timings, suggestion methods, and image display positions are preset is selected from a plurality of patterns. The method and the image display position may be individually selectable.

In the setting suggestion pattern setting process shown in FIG. 20-57, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is being displayed on the image display device 5 (step 117AKS101). The suggested setting pattern setting screen is a screen that displays a list of a plurality of suggested setting patterns and allows the player to select any one of the suggested setting patterns, as shown in FIG. 20-59(B). be. If the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is not being displayed (step 117AKS101; No), it is determined whether or not a customer waiting demo designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS102). If the customer waiting demonstration designation command is not received from the main substrate 11 (step 117 AKS102; No), the setting suggestion pattern setting process is terminated.

The customer-waiting demo designation command is a command that is transmitted when the demonstration display setting is performed on the main board 11 side when the reserved memory number of the special game is "0". In the demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board. 12, and if it has been transmitted, the demonstration display setting is finished as it is, and if it has not been transmitted, a process of transmitting a customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed. The trigger for starting the demonstration screen display is not limited to this example. For example, after 30 seconds have elapsed, processing for starting the demonstration screen display may be executed. In addition, the main board 11 side measures the time after the reserved memory number of the special game becomes "0", and when a certain period of time elapses, a customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, and the effect control board 12 side. , the demo screen may be displayed. Further, when the performance control board 12 does not receive the performance control command from the main board 11 for a predetermined period after the end of the fluctuation, it is determined that the player is not playing, and the demonstration screen display is started. may In addition, the control for starting the display of the demonstration screen may be arbitrary as long as the demonstration screen can be displayed while the customer is waiting.

If the customer waiting demo designation command has been received from the main board 11 (step 117AKS102; Yes), whether or not the player has performed an operation for displaying the setting suggestion pattern setting screen, that is, whether or not the setting suggestion pattern setting has been performed. It is determined whether or not a screen transition operation has been performed (step 117AKS103). The setting suggestion pattern setting screen transition operation may be performed by the player's operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. If the setting suggestion pattern setting screen transition operation has not been performed (step 117 AKS103; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion pattern setting process.

On the other hand, when the setting suggestion pattern setting screen shift operation is performed (step 117AKS103; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays the setting suggestion pattern setting screen for selecting one of the setting suggestion patterns as shown in FIG. 20-55. The setting suggestion mode set in the setting suggestion mode setting process shown in FIG. Specifically, in step 117 AKS104, the setting suggestion mode that has been set is specified by checking the setting suggestion mode storage area, and a list of setting suggestion patterns shown in FIG. , Selectable as a setting suggestion pattern setting screen. As shown in the figure, in this embodiment, patterns 1 to 3 are prepared as setting suggestion patterns, and the contents of the same pattern differ depending on the setting suggestion mode. Further, as shown in the figure, in this embodiment, even if the setting suggestion modes are different, if the setting suggestion pattern is the same, the execution timing of the setting suggestions is common (that is, some content is common regardless of the setting suggestion mode). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused by the complicated execution timing of setting suggestions. In addition to the execution timing, a common setting suggestion pattern (such as the setting suggestion pattern of pattern 4 whose contents are all common) may be prepared regardless of the setting suggestion mode. In addition, even if the setting suggestion pattern is the same, all contents including the execution timing may be different according to the setting suggestion mode. The example shown in FIG. 20-59(B) shows an example in which the setting suggestion mode is the setting suggestion mode 2, and setting suggestion settings for the contents of patterns 1 to 3 shown in FIG. 20-58(B) It shows an example when the screen is displayed. In the processing of step 117 AKS104 in FIG. 20-57, such a setting suggestion setting screen is displayed.

Subsequently, in step 117AKS101, when the setting suggestion pattern setting screen is being displayed (step 117AKS101; Yes), or after displaying the setting suggestion pattern setting screen corresponding to the setting suggestion mode in the processing of step 117AKS104, the operation It is determined whether or not selection operation of a setting suggestion pattern has been performed by means (step 117AKS105). If there is no setting suggestion pattern selection operation (step 117AKS105; No), the setting suggestion pattern setting process is terminated.

When the setting suggestion pattern selection operation is performed (step 117AKS105; Yes), for example, information capable of specifying the selected setting suggestion pattern is stored in the setting suggestion pattern storage area of the effect control data holding area provided in the RAM 122. , the selected setting suggestion pattern is stored (step 117AKS106). It should be noted that any setting suggestion pattern may be stored as an initial value in the setting suggestion pattern storage area. For example, "pattern 2" is stored as an initial value. After the processing of step 117 AKS106, the setting suggestion pattern setting processing ends. When the suggested setting pattern is stored in step 117 AKS106, the suggested setting pattern may be displayed on the screen display device 5 or the like so that the player can recognize it.

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 117AK) In the above embodiment, in the setting suggestion pattern setting process in FIG. Although shown, this is an example. In addition to this, for example, a mission notification effect may be performed in which a certain mission (task or command) is notified so that the player can recognize it, or the player can set the mission to be achieved. The effect operation for informing the mission includes, for example, displaying a effect image indicating the achievement condition on the display screen of the image display device 5, outputting a sound that enables the player to recognize the achievement condition from the speakers 8L and 8R, and playing a game. By turning on a predetermined lamp or LED included in the effect lamp 9 or the decorative LED to notify the achievement condition, or by operating a movable member provided in the performance accessory provided inside or outside the game area. It may be anything that can notify the achievement conditions or can present the achievement conditions to the player by combining some or all of them. The mission notified in this mission notification effect (that is, the mission to be achieved) may include a mission of executing setting suggestions (in addition, execution of super reach A, execution of pseudo-continuous variable display effect, etc. It is sufficient if multiple types of missions are prepared, such as missions such as .

When the mission notified by the mission notification performance is achieved, the performance at the time of mission achievement is executed. The execution mode of the effect at the time of mission completion (predetermined display mode that can appear) may be a mode according to the type of mission set by the player. It is only necessary to execute a mission-achievement production in a mode corresponding to the execution mode of the setting suggestion that has been executed. Further, when it is determined that the mission notified by the mission notification effect is not achieved, the mission failure effect can be executed. Even when the notified mission is not achieved, the variable display result may be "big hit", or the ready-to-win effect by a specific variation pattern may be executed to achieve a predetermined display mode. In this way, the mission presented as the achievement condition is based on the fact that the mission is achieved, and the variable display result is "big hit", or the ready-to-win effect is executed by a specific variation pattern, and a predetermined display mode is executed. On the other hand, even if the mission is not achieved, it is acceptable if there is a possibility that the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or a ready-to-win effect with a specific variation pattern will be executed. Alternatively, even when the mission is accomplished, the variable display result may not be a "big hit" or the ready-to-win effect by a specific variation pattern may not be executed. In this case, when the variable display result is not a "big hit" or when the reach effect by the specific variation pattern is not executed, when the variable display result is "big hit" or when the reach effect by the specific change pattern is executed In comparison, the possibility that the mission is notified is sufficiently reduced, and the variable display result becomes a ``jackpot'' when the mission is achieved, or the ready-to-win performance is executed by a specific variation pattern. You should try to raise people's expectations.

(Description of Means Relating to Characteristic Portion 117AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 117AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of the means 1 related to the characteristic part 117AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs a game, which is advantageous for the player One setting value (for example, one of setting values 1 to 3, etc.) can be set from among multiple types of setting values with different degrees, and a suggestive effect can be executed according to the set setting value. Suggestion effect execution means (for example, executing setting suggestions at different ratios according to set values), and an execution mode in which the execution mode of the suggestion effect can be set based on the operation of the operation means. Setting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 that executes setting suggestion mode setting processing), and a game machine characterized by comprising: According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 117AK, the execution mode setting means can set the execution mode of the suggestive effect based on the operation of the operation means by the game clerk (for example, according to the operation of the game clerk, etc.). The game machine of the means 1 relating to the characterizing part 117AK may be characterized by: According to such a configuration, it is possible to make settings suitable for the game environment, and to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 117AK, the execution mode setting means can set the execution mode of the suggestive effect based on the operation of the operation means by the player (for example, the setting suggestion setting process is executed). The game machine of the means 1 or the means 2 related to the characteristic part 117AK characterized by: According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 117AK, the execution mode setting means can set the execution mode of the suggestive effect based on the player's operation of the operation means within the range set by the game clerk. (for example, the player sets a setting suggestion pattern according to the setting suggestion mode set by the game manager) machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to make settings suitable for the game environment, and it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 117AK, a condition achievement notification execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes an effect at the time of mission achievement, etc. that can execute condition achievement notification that notifies the condition achievement when a predetermined condition is satisfied) ), wherein the condition achievement notification executing means is capable of executing the condition achievement notification in a mode corresponding to the type of the suggested effect that has been executed (for example, if the mission accomplished is execution of the setting suggestion, (e.g., an effect at the time of mission achievement is executed in a mode corresponding to the execution mode of the executed setting suggestion, etc.). good. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 117AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be any game machine of the means 1 to 5 related to the part 117AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Characteristic Portion 118AK) Next, the characteristic portion 118AK of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 20-60 is a flow chart showing an example of the variable display start setting process executed by the characterizing portion 118AK. As shown, in the variable display start setting process executed in the characterizing portion 118AK, the selection effect execution setting process in step 118AKS001 is executed unlike the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 114AK. Further, in the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 118AK, instead of the predetermined effect execution setting process (see FIGS. 20-35) of step 114AKS001 in the variable display start setting process executed in the characteristic portion 114AK, At step 118 AKS002, setting suggestion execution setting processing is executed. Note that other processing is the same as the variable display start setting processing executed in the characteristic portion 114AK, so description thereof will be omitted. The setting suggestion execution setting process in step 118AKS002 is common to the setting suggestion execution setting process in the feature portions 115AK and 116AK in that it is a process of performing setting suggestion (setting suggestion effect suggesting a set value). , the setting suggestion in the characteristic portion 115AK is an effect that is performed during the variable display, and is an effect that is executed at a higher rate when a predetermined condition is satisfied than when the predetermined condition is not satisfied. The suggestion is an effect that is executed regardless of a predetermined condition, such as the characteristic part 115AK, and is an effect that is easily recognized by the player according to the execution mode. On the other hand, the setting suggestion in the characteristic portion 118AK is the effect performed during the execution of the selection effect set in step 118AKS001 (more specifically, during the period when the options before the effect setting is performed). , and is different in that it is an effect related to the selected effect. In the setting suggestion execution setting process of step 118AKS002 in the characteristic portion 118AK, the setting suggestion execution setting different from that in the characteristic portion 115AK and the characteristic portion 116AK is thus performed.

FIG. 20-61 is a flow chart showing an example of the selection effect execution setting process performed in step 118AKS001 of FIG. 20-60. In the selection effect, options (including questions and their selections (answers)) are displayed step by step to the player over a plurality of changes, and the player operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B. It is an effect that sets the type of effect to be executed after that (performs effect setting) according to the answer pattern (response pattern for the displayed options) selected by . That is, in the selection effect in the characteristic portion 118AK, the effect setting is performed according to the selection pattern of options by the player (the pattern of responses to the displayed options), so the effect setting should be performed in accordance with the character and taste of the player. is possible. In addition, since the selection effect is executed over a plurality of variations (because it is performed as part of the effects performed during the variation), it is possible to increase the player's participation rate in the selection operation. Note that the selection effect includes, in addition to the effect of displaying options step by step, a mode of effect corresponding to the effect setting, which is executed in a variation after the effect setting is performed. That is, the selection effect includes the effect of stepwise displaying the options before setting the effect, and the effect in accordance with the effect setting performed after the effect setting is performed. In this way, the selection effect of the characteristic part 118AK is an effect that can be set in accordance with the character and taste of the player over a plurality of variations, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect.

In the selection effect execution setting process shown in FIG. 20-61, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the ON state (step 118AKS002). The setting completion flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and is a flag indicating that the selection of options by the player is completed and the effect setting is completed. The setting completion flag is set to the ON state by selection of the options in the final stage, and is cleared to the OFF state by executing the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, the setting completion flag may be cleared depending on the length of non-game time, such as when the shooting operation has not been performed for a predetermined period of time. In the characteristic portion 118AK, options are displayed on the condition that the setting completion flag is turned off, and effect setting is performed.

If the setting completion flag is OFF (step 118AKS002; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting flag is ON (step 118AKS003). The in-setting flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and indicates whether or not the player is currently selecting an option. Note that the in-setting flag is set to ON when the starting option (first stage option) is displayed at step 118AKS004, which will be described later, and is set to ON at step 118AKS109 when the final stage option is displayed. It is set to OFF state (the setting completion flag is also set to ON state).

When the setting flag is off (step 118AKS003; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the variable display (variation) is executed when the customer waiting state shifts to the variable state, and the starting option (first (step 118AKS004), and the selection effect execution setting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the setting flag is ON (step 118AKS003; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 selects the selection stage (including type) and the options according to the selection content (question content displayed last time and its selection content (answer ) is set (step 118AKS005), and the selection effect execution setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the processing of step 118AKS005, as shown in FIG. 20-62, the selection stages (including types) and options corresponding to the selection content (including question content and its selection content (answer)) are displayed. Make settings. In this embodiment, the level (including type) of displayed options and the contents of selections (answers) made by the player are stored. Then, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-62, according to the stage (including type) of options displayed last time and the content of selection (answer) (that is, according to the content of the previous question and its answer) ), patterns of options to be displayed are prepared in advance. More specifically, for example, if "Yes" is selected in the start option, in step 118AKS005 executed at the start of the next variation, as shown in FIG. 20-62, the second stage option A is will be displayed. Also, if "Yes" is selected in the second stage option A (the second stage is the second stage and the type is option A), the third stage option A is displayed in the next change. is performed, and if "No" is selected, the setting is performed so that option B of the third step is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, in addition to answers in the form of "Yes" or "No", for example, as shown in option A of the third stage, answers in the form of "morning" or "night" are provided. Modes (concrete modes) are prepared in which responses can be made according to the preferences of the user (the same applies to option D in the third step in FIG. 20-62). In the illustrated example, there are two answers. It is also possible to prepare answers for , and choose 3 options. Thus, in step 118AKS005 of FIG. 20-61, following the pattern shown in FIG. Depending on the answer), set to display the options that should be displayed in this change. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 20-62, with the third stage as the final stage option, the setting A It shows an example in which the effect settings of setting H to setting H are performed respectively. In addition, the display stage of options is not limited to the third stage, and more stages may be provided, and the same applies to the number of settings. Also, even when different options are displayed in the final stage, there may be a pattern in which the set effect settings are the same. In this embodiment, the effects such as setting A to setting H are determined according to the player's selection pattern, and the content and background of the effect to be executed, the output volume, the brightness of the light emitted, etc. are different. there is Specifically, in the characteristic portion 118AK, one of setting A to setting H is determined for each player type according to the player's selection pattern. For example, as an option selection pattern, a player who selects "Yes" in the second stage option B and "Yes" in the third stage option C shown in FIG. "Setting E" is determined as a type of player. In "Setting E", the production setting tends to be generally preferred by active players, such as using battle production as the production content, using primary colors as the background, and increasing the output volume compared to other settings. is done. Also, for example, a player who selects "Yes" in the second stage option A shown in FIG. 20-62 in the second stage and selects "Yes" in the third stage option A "Setting A" is determined as a type of player. In "Setting A", an effect is executed to inform the player of the expected degree of the big win in a manner that the player can easily recognize the degree of expectation, for example, by displaying the degree of expectation for the big win as the content of the effect. In addition, the background, output volume, and the like may be the same as or different from other effect settings. In other words, it is only necessary that the setting A to setting H are set in advance for each type of player, and it is assumed that the player of that type would like the effects. It should be noted that, for example, in the middle of a game, if the content of the determined effect setting does not suit the player's taste, it may be possible to change to another effect setting. In this case, it may be possible to store the contents of the effect settings before change and the effect settings after change, and to increase the options and effect settings by learning. For example, when "Yes" is answered in option C of the third stage shown in FIG. For example, an option such as "Do you like fighting manga?" may be added, and "setting E1" and "setting E2" may be added according to this answer.

On the other hand, if the setting completion flag is ON (step 118AKS002; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets to execute the effect according to one of the settings A to H shown in FIG. 20-62. (Step 118AKS006), the selection effect execution setting process is terminated. In addition, in the processing of step 118AKS004 and step 118AKS005, a period for displaying options as a selection effect and a response period for the option are also set (selection effect period is set). Also, in step 118AKS006, a period during which an effect corresponding to the set effect setting is executed is set as a selected effect period. If the player does not perform any operation, an arbitrary answer may be selected at the end of the answer period.

Returning to FIG. 20-60, after executing the selection effect execution setting process of step 118AKS001, the effect control CPU 120 executes setting suggestion execution setting process (step 118AKS002). FIG. 20-63 is a flow chart showing an example of the setting suggestion execution setting process executed by the characterizing portion 118AK. In the setting suggestion execution setting process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the ON state (step 118AKS002). In the characteristic part 118AK, a setting suggestion, which is an effect suggesting a set value, is performed during execution of a selection effect in which options are displayed before the effect setting is performed. Therefore, in step 118AKS002, it is determined whether or not the effect setting has already been performed by confirming whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the ON state. If the selection completion flag is ON (step 118AKS010; Yes), that is, if the effect setting has already been performed, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the setting suggestion is not executable, and continues the setting suggestion execution setting process. finish.

On the other hand, when the selection completion flag is off (step 118AKS010; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the setting suggestion, assuming that the setting suggestion is executable (step 118AKS011). Specifically, in the processing of step 118AKS011, it is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion based on the variable display result and according to the determination ratio shown in FIG. 20-64. The set performance in this embodiment is a performance executed during the period when the options are displayed in the selection performance, and when executed, the degree of expectation for a big win is higher than when it is not executed. Further, in the processing of step 118AKS002, for example, the later the timing at which the setting suggestion is executed, the higher the degree of expectation. may Specifically, the setting suggestion in the characteristic portion 118AK is an effect that is performed during the period when the options are displayed in the selection effect, and the options are from the first stage to the third stage (final stage), that is, three times. is displayed over the variation of . Therefore, for example, it is better to suggest a setting at the timing when the third stage option, which is the final stage, is displayed rather than at the timing when the first stage option or the second stage option is displayed. However, the degree of expectation for a big win may be increased. In this embodiment, the setting suggestion is not performed at the timing when the options in the first stage are displayed, that is, at the timing when the options at the start are displayed. is ON). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's willingness to make a selection from being reduced due to the setting suggestion being made in the first option. Also, the setting suggestion may be performed at the timing when the options of the first stage are displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, setting suggestions can be executed at a plurality of timings, such as the timing at which the second-stage options are displayed and the timing at which the third-stage options are displayed. may be executable only.

Also, instead of the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may differ according to the set setting value. For example, the setting suggestion execution ratio may decrease in the order of setting value "3">setting value "2">setting value "1". Furthermore, in addition to the variable display result, the setting suggestion execution ratio may differ according to the set setting value. For example, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the set value is "3" > when the variable display result is "loss" and the set value is "3"> when the variable display result is "big hit" Yes and the set value is "2" > The variable display result is "losing" and the set value is "2" > The variable display result is "big win" and the set value is "1" The setting suggestion execution ratio may decrease in the order of case > variable display result is “no” and setting value is “1”. Returning to FIG. 20-63, after executing the process of step 118AKS011, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is decided to execute the setting suggestion in step 118AKS011, that is, whether or not there is setting suggestion execution (step 118AKS012). If there is no setting execution suggestion, that is, if it is determined not to execute setting suggestion in step 118AKS011 (step 118AKS012; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the setting suggestion execution setting process as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined to execute the setting suggestion at step 118AKS011, that is, when there is setting suggestion (step 118AKS012; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the setting suggestion execution mode (setting suggestion mode) (step 118AKS013). ), the setting suggestion execution setting process is terminated. Specifically, in the process of step 118AKS013, based on the setting values that have been set, according to the determination ratios shown in FIG. ” is determined as the execution mode of the setting suggestion.

"Setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)" in this embodiment is a mode in which an image of character A is displayed on the display of options, and is a mode that suggests that the setting value is "1". "Setting suggestion mode 2 (character B)" is a mode in which an image of character B is displayed on the display of options, and is a mode in which the setting value is suggested to be "2". "Setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)" is a mode in which an image of character B is displayed on the display of options, and is a mode that suggests that the setting value is "3". In addition to this, instead of the setting value itself, for example, it suggests that the setting value is not "1", that it is a high setting value, that it is an even setting value, that it is an odd setting value, may be suggested by each aspect.

As shown in FIG. 20-65, in the characterizing portion 118AK, different execution ratios are set according to the setting values that have been set, and determination ratios are set so that setting suggestions can be executed in different modes. Therefore, different types of setting suggestions are executed at different execution ratios according to the set values, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. Further, as shown in FIG. 20-65, the setting suggestion in the mode of "setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)" is determined only when the setting value is "3". Therefore, when the setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)" is made, the setting value "3" is confirmed. On the other hand, setting suggestions of "setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)" and "setting suggestion mode 2 (character B)" are determined regardless of the set value. Therefore, when setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 1 (character A)" or setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 2 (character B)" is performed, setting suggestion of "setting suggestion mode 3 (character C)" The reliability of the suggestion is different from the case where the That is, the reliability of suggestion differs depending on the setting suggestion mode to be executed. Therefore, it is possible to execute setting suggestions of different types with different degrees of reliability, and to enhance the presentation effect.

In this way, in the characteristic portion 118AK, after the execution setting of the selection effect is made, when the options are displayed during variation, different character images are displayed on the display of the options at different ratios according to the set value. Execution setting of the setting suggestion is performed. As a result, during the display of the options in the selection effect, it is possible to execute setting suggestions in different modes at different ratios according to the set values, thereby enhancing the effect of the effect. Note that setting suggestions are not limited to character images, and may be performed in various manners such as message display, lamp lighting, voice output, and the like.

FIG. 20-66 is a flow chart showing an example of the effect processing during variable display executed by the characterizing portion 118AK. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on the timer value of the effect control process timer (step S801). Production control CPU120, for example, to update the timer value of the production control process timer (for example, 1 subtraction), when the end code is read from the production control pattern corresponding to the production control process timer value after the update. Then, it is determined that the variable display time (variation time) has passed.

When it is determined that the variable display time has not elapsed in step S801 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the ready-to-win effect period for executing the ready-to-win effect (step S804 ). The ready-to-win effect period may be predetermined, for example, in the effect control pattern determined according to the variation pattern. When it is determined that it is the ready-to-win effect period (step S804; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs control for executing the ready-to-win effect, such as displaying a background image for the ready-to-win effect (step S805).

After executing the process of step S805, or when it is determined that it is not the ready-to-win effect period (step S804; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the selection effect period (step 118AKS101). The start time of the selection effect period is the timing of displaying the option (option display timing) or the execution timing of the effect according to the setting content, which is determined in the processing of step 118AKS003 or step 118AKS004 of FIG. 20-61. The length of the effect period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern determined in the process of step S532 according to each effect.

When it is determined that it is the selection effect period (step 118AKS101; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting completion flag is set to the ON state (step 118AKS102). If the setting completion flag is off (step 118AKS102; No), then it is determined whether or not the setting flag is on (step 118AKS103). The in-setting flag is provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and indicates whether or not the player is currently selecting an option. It should be noted that the setting flag is set to ON when the starting option (first stage option) is displayed, and is set to OFF when the final stage option is displayed (together, the setting is completed). flag is set to the ON state). When the setting flag is off (step 118AKS103; No), the effect control CPU 120 displays the option at the start as a variable display (variation) executed when the customer waiting state changes to the variable state. This is displayed on the device 5 and the in-setting flag is set to ON (step 118AKS104). In addition, when the player selects the options displayed in step 118 AKS104 (including the case where the selection operation is not performed and the answer period ends), the contents (the stage of the displayed options (including the type) and the player's selection (response)), and the display of the selection is erased.

On the other hand, when the setting flag is ON (step 118AKS103; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 displays options according to the previously displayed options and their selection contents (answers) (step 118AKS105). For example, in step 118AKS105, if the option displayed last time is the starting option shown in FIG. 20-62 and the content of the selection (answer) is "Yes", the option of option A of the second stage is displayed. In addition, when the option displayed last time is the option of the second stage option A shown in FIG. indicate. After executing the processing of step 118AKS105 shown in FIG. 20-66, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the setting suggestion period (step 118AKS106). The start time of the setting suggestion period may be determined by the processing of step 118AKS011 in FIG. 20-63, and the length of the setting suggestion period is determined by the processing of step S532 according to the setting suggestion execution mode. It suffices if it is predetermined in the produced effect control pattern. It should be noted that the start time of the setting suggestion period may also be changed according to the mode of execution of the setting suggestion. In addition, when the player performs a selection operation on the options displayed in step 118 AKS105 (including the case where the selection operation is not performed and the answer period ends), the contents (the stage (including type) of the options displayed) and the player's selection (response)), and the display of the selection is erased. Also, when the displayed option is the final stage option, the effect setting corresponding to the content of the selection is stored.

If it is the setting suggestion period (step 118AKS106; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the setting suggestion determined in step 118AKS013 of FIG. 20-63 (step 118AKS107). After executing the process of step 118AKS107, or when it is determined that it is not the setting suggestion period in step 118AKS106 (step 118AKS106; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines that the option displayed in the process of step 118AKS105 is the final stage option. (step 118AKS108). When the displayed option is the final stage option (step 118AKS108; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 clears the setting flag to OFF state and sets the setting completion flag to ON state (step 118AKS109).

When it is determined that the setting completion flag is in the ON state at step 118AKS102 (step 118AKS102; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect according to the setting contents, that is, any effect setting from setting A to setting H. Control is performed to execute a corresponding effect (step 118AKS110).

After executing any one of steps 118AKS110, step 118AKS104, and step 118AKS109, if it is determined at step 118AKS101 that it is not the selection effect period (step 118AKS101; No), or if it is determined that it is not the final stage at step 118AKS108 (Step 118AKS108; No), the production control CPU 120 executes production during variable display, including the variable display operation of decorative symbols, based on the settings in the production control pattern determined corresponding to the variation pattern. (step S808), and the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not a pattern confirmation command transmitted from the main substrate 11 has been received (step S809). At this time, if no pattern confirmation command is received (step S809; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the game waits.

When there is reception of the pattern confirmation command in step S809 (step S809; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is, for example, to transmit a predetermined display control command to the VDP of the display control unit 123, such as a decoration. Control for deriving and displaying the final stop pattern (determined ornamental pattern), which is the display result in the variable display of patterns, is performed (step S810). Subsequently, a certain period of time is set in advance as a wait time for receiving a command specifying the start of a big hit (step S811). Next, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S812), and ends the effect process during variable display. In this manner, selection effects and setting suggestions are executed in the characteristic portion 118AK.

FIG. 20-67 shows an effect operation example when the selection effect and setting suggestion are executed. The illustrated example shows an example in which the setting suggestion of the setting suggestion mode 3 (character C) is made at the timing of displaying the options of the second stage. When the customer waiting state shifts to the change state and the change starts, as shown in FIG. indicate. Then, the variation ends as shown in FIG. 20-67(B). Subsequently, when the next variation is started and the selection effect period is reached, if it is determined as "Yes" in the option at the start, as shown in FIG. Stage option A is displayed. Note that the example shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-1) shows the case where it is decided not to execute the setting suggestion. On the other hand, if it is determined as "No" in the options at the start, as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), the second stage option B is displayed as the option 118AK001. Note that the example shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2) shows the case where it is decided to execute the setting suggestion. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), along with the option 118AK001, the setting suggestion mode 3 (character C) is suggested, and the image of character C is displayed on the option. Note that the position where the character image as the setting suggestion is displayed may be any position. In addition, when it is determined as "Yes" in the options at the start, as shown in FIG. If it is determined to execute, a setting suggestion is made in the same manner as in FIG. be.

Subsequently, after the second stage options shown in Figure 20-67 (C-1) and Figure 20-67 (C-2) are displayed, depending on the selection (answer) of the option, in the next change Choices in the final stage are displayed, and depending on the content of the selection (answer), as shown in Fig. 20-67 (D-1) and Fig. 20-67 (D-2), effect setting corresponding to the content of selection is performed. . In the example shown in FIG. 20-67 (D-1), "setting A" is set as the effect setting, and in the example shown in FIG. 20-67 (D-2), "setting E" is set as the effect setting. showing. After that, in the variations that are continuously executed, an effect in a mode corresponding to the set effect setting is executed. In this example, setting suggestion is performed by displaying a character image on the option including the question content and the selected content (answer). Yes or No) may be displayed above. Also, for example, instead of displaying character images, the display color of the question content and the display color of the selection content may be set to a display color different from the normal display color (for example, one of three modes such as green, blue, and red). You may make it suggest a setting by.

(Modified Example of Characteristic Portion 118AK) In the setting suggestion in the above embodiment, an example in which a character image is displayed on the display of options has been shown, but this is just an example. For example, the options displayed in the selection effect are set by setting them as options with special contents different from the question contents shown in Fig. 20-62, such as "Can you cancel the afternoon schedule?" A suggestion may be made. Specifically, in the setting suggestion execution setting process in step 118AKS002 of FIG. 20-60, when the setting suggestion is to be executed, the question content of the special content may be determined from among a plurality of question contents as the mode of execution. Then, after the selection effect execution setting process is performed at step 118AKS001 in FIG. 20-60, the setting suggestion execution setting process is performed at step 118AKS002. The selected option may be changed to the setting suggestion (determined question content) determined in the setting suggestion execution setting process of step 118AKS002. Incidentally, as the setting suggestion mode, it is sufficient if three modes of special content are prepared as shown in FIG. 20-65. That is, in the modification, setting suggestions are displayed as options in the selection effect. According to this, options with special contents can be displayed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced.

FIG. 20-68 shows an effect operation example when the selection effect and setting suggestion are executed in the modification. In the illustrated example, as shown in FIG. 20-67 (C-2), along with option 118AK001, setting suggestion mode 3 (character C) is suggested, and an image of character C is displayed on the option. Unlike, as shown in FIG. 20-68 (C-2), special content 118AK002 is displayed when executing a setting suggestion. As shown in the figure, when displaying special contents, the display frame and To display a message (including selection contents) in a thick, large size and blinking manner so as to be easily recognized by a player. Thus, in the setting suggestions in this modified example, options with special contents are displayed in a manner that makes it easier for the player to recognize options than with normal options. Therefore, the performance effect can be enhanced. It should be noted that any mode may be used as long as it is easier for the player to recognize options for special content than for normal options. Also, the character image displayed in the setting suggestion in the above embodiment may be displayed in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize, such as by blinking. That is, in this modified example, the images (for example, options with special contents and character images) displayed as setting suggestions are displayed in a manner that is easier to recognize than normal options. According to this, the production effect can be enhanced. In addition, when it is determined as "Yes" in the options at the start, as shown in FIG. If it is decided to execute it, the special content 118AK002 should be displayed as in FIG. 20-68 (C-2).

In addition, in the above modified example, an example of displaying options for special contents as options for setting effects as selection effects in the above embodiment is shown, but this is just an example. For example, as in the above-described embodiment, a super reach effect such as "chance", "super reach", "NEXT", etc. is performed instead of the option of the selection effect that the player selects. Multiple options are displayed like a roulette, such as an option indicating that a variable display effect will be performed, and one is selected over time (selected regardless of operation) Roulette As one of options in the effect, a suggestive image suggesting a set value such as "setting 2" may be displayed. In addition, for example, if the option of "chance" is selected, it will be in the reach state and the reach effect will be executed (including normal reach), and if the option of "super reach" is selected, the reach effect of super reach will be executed. When the option "NEXT" is selected, the effect of the content of the selected option may be executed, such as a pseudo-continuous variable display effect. That is, the suggestive image is displayed as one of the options of the roulette effect in which one of the multiple options is selected over time regardless of the operation. According to this, it is possible to suggest a setting as part of the roulette presentation, and to improve the amusement of the game.

(Description of Means Relating to Characteristic Portion 118AK) Regarding the characteristic portion 118AK, conventionally, there is a gaming machine that can change game settings, for example, disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2010-200902. Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 describes performing display control of effects based on set values, and executing processing for displaying character images of a giraffe, an elephant, and a lion at a predetermined timing. In addition, the predetermined timing can be considered, for example, when the special pattern fluctuates, but it may be regular (at the time of all fluctuations, every predetermined number of fluctuations, etc.), or irregularly (such as when winning a random number lottery). It states that there may be However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902, it is not always possible to enhance the presentation effect in the gaming machine that is configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value. . Therefore, as a gaming machine of means 1 related to the characteristic part 118AK for providing a gaming machine capable of enhancing the performance effect, a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1, etc.) that performs a game, which is advantageous for the player One setting value (for example, one of setting values 1 to 3, etc.) can be set from among multiple types of setting values with different degrees, and multiple option images are displayed as multiple options. a selection effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for displaying options in the selection effect) capable of executing a selection effect of selecting the option image, and when the selection effect is executed by the selection effect execution means. In addition, it is possible to display a suggestive image according to the set value (for example, when options are displayed while changing, different character images are displayed on the option display at different rates according to the set value etc.). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 2 related to the characteristic part 118AK, the selection effect execution means can execute the selection effect over a plurality of variable displays (for example, from the customer waiting state to the variable state , etc.), and the effect mode can be set by selecting the plurality of option images displayed over the plurality of variable displays (for example, the player can select The game machine of the means 1 related to the characterizing part 118AK may be characterized by setting an effect according to the selection pattern (an answer pattern to the displayed options). According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 3 related to the characteristic part 118AK, the selection effect executing means can display the plurality of option images including the suggestive image (for example, the options displayed in the selection effect can be displayed as options with special content). The game machine of means 1 or 2 relating to the characteristic part 118AK characterized by: According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the gaming machine of the means 4 related to the characteristic part 118AK, the selection effect execution means can display the suggestion image in a manner that is easier for the player to recognize than the plurality of option images (for example, display by setting suggestion). The game of any one of means 1 to 3 relating to the characteristic part 118AK, characterized by displaying images (for example, special content options and character images) in a manner that is easier to recognize than normal options). machine. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As the game machine of the means 5 related to the characteristic part 118AK, the selection effect execution means includes, as the plurality of option images, the suggestion image and the effect notification image for notifying the content of the predetermined effect to be executed when selected. , can be displayed, and it is possible to execute the selection effect in which any of the option images is selected regardless of the player's selection operation (for example, one of a plurality of options is selected over time The game machine according to any one of means 1 to 4 relating to the characteristic part 118AK, characterized in that a suggestive image is displayed as one of options for a roulette effect that is selected without being caused by an operation, etc.) good too. According to such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the performance effect.

As a game machine of means 6 related to the characteristic part 118AK, information output means (for example, game control microcomputer) capable of outputting setting value information (for example, setting value command) that can specify which setting value is set step 121 in step 100 for executing IWS031 and S108); and suggestive effect execution means (for example, (a part that executes steps 121IWS308 to S315 in the performance control CPU 120), and a suggestive effect (for example, an initial comet effect with an even initial comet) can be executed, and if the set value information is not input normally, the first suggestive effect is not executed as the suggestive effect, and the It is possible to execute the second suggestive effect as the suggestive effect (for example, the effect control CPU 120 does not execute the initial comet effect by the special initial comet by executing step 121IWS313). It may be a game machine of any one of the means 1 to 5 related to the part 118AK. According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game in the gaming machine configured to be able to control the advantageous state based on the set value.

(Description of Association of Characteristic Portions) Each configuration related to the characteristic portion 31AK, the characteristic portion 121IW, and the characteristic portions 112AK to 118AK may be appropriately combined with part or all of each configuration related to other characteristic portions. good. Features that are combined in this way, or individual features that are not combined, may be combined with part or all of each configuration relating to other features as appropriate. For example, in the characteristic portion 121IW, when a setting value command cannot be received normally due to a command failure or data garbled, an odd initial roll or a special initial roll is generated even though a disadvantageous setting value is set. To reduce a situation in which a player is rather discouraged by displaying an eye, and to prevent a decrease in interest in a game. This characteristic part is applied to the setting suggestion in the characteristic part 112AK to the characteristic part 118AK, and not limited to the setting value command. In order to prevent the execution of the setting suggestion suggesting a setting value advantageous to the player despite the fact that the setting value is set, the setting suggestion suggesting that the setting value is low may be executed.

Further, for example, as an example of the setting suggestion mode in the characteristic portion 117AK, there may be a mode in which the effect setting in the characteristic portion 118AK is possible. Then, for example, as an example of setting A to setting H of the effect setting in the characteristic portion 118AK, for example, any one characteristic portion of the characteristic portion 31AK, the characteristic portions 112AK to 116AK, or a combination of a plurality of characteristic portions is the effect setting. may be determined as

1 Pachinko game machine 2 Game board 3 Game machine frames 4A, 4B Special symbol display device 5 Image display device 6A Winning ball device 6B Variable winning ball device 7 Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R Speaker 9... Game effect lamp 10... General prize winning port 11... Main board 12... Production control board 13... Audio control board 14... Lamp control board 15... Relay board 20... Normal symbol display 21... Gate switches 22A, 22B... Starting port Switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Ball-hitting handle 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 32 ... Movable body 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM 102, 122 ... RAM 103 ... CPU 104, 124 ... Random number circuit 105, 125 ... I /O120 ... CPU for effect control 123 ... Display control unit

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state for a player by executing variable display of specific identification information and deriving a specific display result as a result of the variable display of the specific identification information,
game control means;
production control means;
a display means;
The game control means is
Determining whether or not to be controlled to the advantageous state when the game medium enters the starting area,
perform variable display of the specific identification information;
Based on the result of the determination, a first variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, a second variation pattern that is a variation pattern controlled to the advantageous state, and a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state and a fourth variation pattern that is a variation pattern that is not controlled to the advantageous state. Determine any variation pattern from among a plurality of variation patterns,
When the first variation pattern is determined, a first command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the second variation pattern is determined, a second command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the third variation pattern is determined, a third command is transmitted to the effect control means,
When the fourth variation pattern is determined, a fourth command is transmitted to the effect control means,
The production control means is
variable display of the decoration identification information corresponding to the variable display of the specific identification information can be executed using the display means;
When receiving the first command, it is possible to notify that it is controlled to the advantageous state with a predetermined reach using a specific character,
When the second command is received, it is possible to notify that the expected degree of control to the advantageous state is different from that of the predetermined reach and that the control to the advantageous state is performed with the specific reach using the specific character. is possible and
When the third command is received, it is possible to notify that the predetermined reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
When the fourth command is received, it is possible to notify that the specific reach is not controlled to the advantageous state,
A common animation effect using the specific character can be executed in a predetermined period immediately before the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach and the title notification corresponding to the specific reach are performed,
When the first command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size smaller than the first size during the predetermined period. In addition, the reach mode is set, and after the predetermined period is over, the title announcement corresponding to the predetermined reach is either a normal mode or a change mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the normal mode and controlled to the advantageous state. , and it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the presentation mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach is completed, and to the predetermined reach. Even after the corresponding title notification is completed, the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode,
When the second command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode during the predetermined period. a reach mode, and after the predetermined period is over, title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode; It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the corresponding title notification is finished, and even after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is finished. The decoration identification information is the second size and the reach mode,
When the third command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode during the predetermined period. A reach mode is adopted, and after the predetermined period is over, title notification corresponding to the predetermined reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode in which the degree of expectation is higher than the normal mode, and in the predetermined reach. It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the presentation mode of the predetermined reach at a plurality of timings after the notification of the corresponding title is finished, and even after the notification of the title corresponding to the predetermined reach is finished. The decoration identification information is the second size and the reach mode,
When the fourth command is received, the decoration identification information is set to the first size and the reach mode before the predetermined period, and the decoration identification information is set to the second size and the reach mode during the predetermined period. a reach mode, and after the predetermined period is over, title notification corresponding to the specific reach can be executed in either a normal mode or a variation mode with a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode; It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the performance mode of the specific reach at a plurality of timings after the corresponding title notification is finished, and even after the title notification corresponding to the specific reach is finished. The decoration identification information is the second size and the reach mode ,
The game machine , wherein the common animation effect is not a plurality of types but only one type of effect .

Images